GKD-C Adaptive-Lookback Variety RSI [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Adaptive-Lookback Variety RSI is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-C Adaptive-Lookback Variety RSI
What is the Adaptive Lookback Period?
The adaptive lookback period is a technique used in technical analysis to adjust the period of an indicator based on changes in market conditions. This technique is particularly useful in volatile or rapidly changing markets where a fixed period may not be optimal for detecting trends or signals.
The concept of the adaptive lookback period is relatively simple. By adjusting the lookback period based on changes in market conditions, traders can more accurately identify trends and signals. This can help traders to enter and exit trades at the right time and improve the profitability of their trading strategies.
The adaptive lookback period works by identifying potential swing points in the market. Once these points are identified, the lookback period is calculated based on the number of swings and a speed parameter. The swing count parameter determines the number of swings that must occur before the lookback period is adjusted. The speed parameter controls the rate at which the lookback period is adjusted, with higher values indicating a more rapid adjustment.
The adaptive lookback period can be applied to a wide range of technical indicators, including moving averages, oscillators, and trendlines. By adjusting the period of these indicators based on changes in market conditions, traders can reduce the impact of noise and false signals, leading to more profitable trades.
In summary, the adaptive lookback period is a powerful technique for traders and analysts looking to optimize their technical indicators. By adjusting the period based on changes in market conditions, traders can more accurately identify trends and signals, leading to more profitable trades. While there are various ways to implement the adaptive lookback period, the basic concept remains the same, and traders can adapt and customize the technique to suit their individual needs and trading styles.
This indicator includes 10 types of RSI
1. Regular RSI
2. Slow RSI
3. Ehlers Smoothed RSI
4. Cutler's RSI
5. Rapid RSI
6. Harris' RSI
7. RSI DEMA
8. RSI TEMA
9. RSI T3
10. Jurik RSX
Regular RSI
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) is a widely used technical indicator in the field of financial market analysis. Developed by J. Welles Wilder Jr. in 1978, the RSI is a momentum oscillator that measures the speed and change of price movements. It helps traders identify potential trend reversals, overbought, and oversold conditions in a market.
The RSI is calculated based on the average gains and losses of an asset over a specified period, typically 14 days. The formula for calculating the RSI is as follows:
RSI = 100 - (100 / (1 + RS))
Where:
RS (Relative Strength) = Average gain over the specified period / Average loss over the specified period
The RSI ranges from 0 to 100, with values above 70 generally considered overbought (potentially indicating that the asset is overvalued and may experience a price decline) and values below 30 considered oversold (potentially indicating that the asset is undervalued and may experience a price increase).
Slow RSI
Slow RSI is a modified version of the Relative Strength Index (RSI) indicator that aims to provide a smoother, more consistent signal than the traditional RSI. The Slow RSI is designed to be less sensitive to sudden price movements, which can cause false signals.
To calculate Slow RSI, we first calculate the up and down values, just like in traditional RSI and Ehlers RSI. The up and down values are calculated by comparing the current price to the previous price, and then adding up the positive and negative differences.
Next, we calculate the Slow RSI value using the formula:
SlowRSI = 100 * up / (up + dn)
where "up" and "dn" are the total positive and negative differences, respectively.
This formula is similar to the one used in traditional RSI, but the dynamic lookback period based on the average of the up and down values is used to smooth out the signal.
Finally, we apply smoothing to the Slow RSI value by taking an exponential moving average (EMA) of the Slow RSI values over a specified period. This EMA helps to reduce the impact of sudden price movements and provide a smoother, more consistent signal over time.
Ehler's Smoothed RSI
Ehlers RSI is a modified version of the Relative Strength Index (RSI) indicator created by John Ehlers, a well-known technical analyst and author. The purpose of Ehlers RSI is to reduce lag and improve the responsiveness of the traditional RSI indicator.
To calculate Ehlers RSI, we first smooth the prices by taking a weighted average of the current price and the two previous prices. This smoothing helps to reduce noise in the data and produce a more accurate signal.
Next, we calculate the up and down values differently than in traditional RSI. In traditional RSI, the up and down values are based on the difference between the current price and the previous price. In Ehlers RSI, the up and down values are based on the difference between the current price and the price two bars ago. This approach helps to reduce lag and produce a more responsive indicator.
Finally, we calculate Ehlers RSI using the formula:
EhlersRSI = 50 * (up - down) / (up + down) + 50
The result is a more timely signal that can help traders identify potential trends and reversals in the market. However, as with any technical indicator, Ehlers RSI should be used in conjunction with other analysis tools and should not be relied on as the sole basis for trading decisions.
Cutler's RSI
Cutler's RSI (Relative Strength Index) is a variation of the traditional RSI, a popular technical analysis indicator used to measure the speed and change of price movements. The main difference between Cutler's RSI and the traditional RSI is the calculation method used to smooth the data. While the traditional RSI uses an exponential moving average (EMA) to smooth the data, Cutler's RSI uses a simple moving average (SMA).
Here's the formula for Cutler's RSI:
1. Calculate the price change: Price Change = Current Price - Previous Price
2. Calculate the average gain and average loss over a specified period (usually 14 days):
If Price Change > 0, add it to the total gains.
If Price Change < 0, add the absolute value to the total losses.
3. Calculate the average gain and average loss by dividing the totals by the specified period: Average Gain = Total Gains / Period, Average Loss = Total Losses / Period
4. Calculate the Relative Strength (RS): RS = Average Gain / Average Loss
5. Calculate Cutler's RSI: Cutler's RSI = 100 - (100 / (1 + RS))
Cutler's RSI is not necessarily better than the regular RSI; it's just a different variation of the traditional RSI that uses a simple moving average (SMA) instead of an exponential moving average (EMA) quantifiedstrategies.com. The main advantage of Cutler's RSI is that it is not data length dependent, meaning it returns consistent results regardless of the length of the period, or the starting point within a data file quantifiedstrategies.com.
However, it's worth noting that Cutler's RSI does not necessarily outperform the traditional RSI. In fact, backtests reveal that Cutler's RSI is no improvement compared to Wilder's RSI quantifiedstrategies.com. Additionally, using an SMA instead of an EMA in Cutler's RSI may result in the loss of the "believed" advantage of weighting the most recent price action aaii.com.
Both Cutler's RSI and the traditional RSI can be used to identify overbought/oversold levels, support and resistance, spot divergences for possible reversals, and confirm the signals from other indicators investopedia.com. Ultimately, the choice between Cutler's RSI and the traditional RSI depends on personal preference and the specific trading strategy being employed.
Rapid RSI
Rapid RSI is a technical analysis indicator that is a modified version of the Relative Strength Index (RSI). It was developed by Andrew Cardwell and was first introduced in the October 2006 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks & Commodities magazine.
The Rapid RSI improves upon the regular RSI by modifying the way the average gains and losses are calculated. Here's a general breakdown of the Rapid RSI calculation:
1. Calculate the upward change (when the price has increased) and the downward change (when the price has decreased) for each period.
2. Calculate the simple moving average (SMA) of the upward changes and the SMA of the downward changes over the specified period.
3. Divide the SMA of the upward changes by the SMA of the downward changes to get the relative strength (RS).
4. Calculate the Rapid RSI by transforming the relative strength (RS) into a value ranging from 0 to 100.
By using the simple moving average (SMA) instead of the slow exponential moving average (RMA) as in the regular RSI, the Rapid RSI tends to be more responsive to recent price changes. This can help traders identify overbought and oversold conditions more quickly, potentially leading to earlier entry and exit points. However, it is important to note that a faster indicator may also produce more false signals.
Harris' RSI
Harris RSI (Relative Strength Index) is a technical indicator used in financial analysis to measure the strength or weakness of a security over time. It was developed by Larry Harris in 1986 as an alternative to the traditional RSI, which measures the price change of a security over a given period.
The Harris RSI uses a slightly different formula from the traditional RSI, but it is based on the same principles. It calculates the ratio of the average gain to the average loss over a specified period, typically 14 days. The result is then plotted on a scale of 0 to 100, with high values indicating overbought conditions and low values indicating oversold conditions.
The Harris RSI is believed to be more responsive to short-term price movements than the traditional RSI, making it useful for traders who are looking for quick trading opportunities. However, like any technical indicator, it should be used in conjunction with other forms of analysis to make informed trading decisions.
The calculation of the Harris RSI involves several steps:
1. Calculate the price change over the specified period (usually 14 days) using the following formula:
Price Change = Close Price - Prior Close Price
2. Calculate the average gain and average loss over the same period, using separate formulas for each:
Average Gain = (Sum of Gains over the Period) / Period
Average Loss = (Sum of Losses over the Period) / Period
Gains are calculated as the sum of all positive price changes over the period, while losses are calculated as the sum of all negative price changes over the period.
3. Calculate the Relative Strength (RS) as the ratio of the Average Gain to the Average Loss:
RS = Average Gain / Average Loss
4. Calculate the Harris RSI using the following formula:
Harris RSI = 100 - (100 / (1 + RS))
The resulting Harris RSI value is a number between 0 and 100, which is plotted on a chart to identify overbought or oversold conditions in the security. A value above 70 is generally considered overbought, while a value below 30 is generally considered oversold.
DEMA RSI
DEMA RSI is a variation of the Relative Strength Index (RSI) technical indicator that incorporates the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA) for smoothing. Like the regular RSI, the DEMA RSI is a momentum oscillator used to measure the speed and change of price movements, and it ranges from 0 to 100. Readings below 30 typically indicate oversold conditions, while readings above 70 indicate overbought conditions.
The DEMA RSI aims to improve upon the regular RSI by addressing its limitations, such as lag and false signals. By using the DEMA, a more responsive and faster RSI can be achieved. Here's a general breakdown of the DEMA RSI calculation:
1. Calculate the price change for each period, as well as the absolute value of the change.
2. Apply the DEMA smoothing technique to both the price change and its absolute value, separately. This involves calculating two sets of exponential moving averages and combining them to create a double-weighted moving average with reduced lag.
3. Divide the smoothed price change by the smoothed absolute value of the price change.
4. Transform the result into a value ranging from 0 to 100 to obtain the DEMA RSI.
The DEMA RSI is considered an improvement over the regular RSI because it provides faster and more responsive signals. This can help traders identify overbought and oversold conditions more accurately and potentially avoid false signals.
In summary, the main advantages of these RSI variations over the regular RSI are their ability to reduce noise, provide smoother lines, and be more responsive to price changes. This can lead to more accurate signals and fewer false positives in different market conditions.
TEMA RSI
TEMA RSI is a variation of the Relative Strength Index (RSI) technical indicator that incorporates the Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA) for smoothing. Like the regular RSI, the TEMA RSI is a momentum oscillator used to measure the speed and change of price movements, and it ranges from 0 to 100. Readings below 30 typically indicate oversold conditions, while readings above 70 indicate overbought conditions.
The TEMA RSI aims to improve upon the regular RSI by addressing its limitations, such as lag and false signals. By using the TEMA, a more responsive and faster RSI can be achieved. Here's a general breakdown of the TEMA RSI calculation:
1. Calculate the price change for each period, as well as the absolute value of the change.
2. Apply the TEMA smoothing technique to both the price change and its absolute value, separately. This involves calculating two sets of exponential moving averages and combining them to create a double-weighted moving average with reduced lag.
3. Divide the smoothed price change by the smoothed absolute value of the price change.
4. Transform the result into a value ranging from 0 to 100 to obtain the TEMA RSI.
The TEMA RSI is considered an improvement over the regular RSI because it provides faster and more responsive signals. This can help traders identify overbought and oversold conditions more accurately and potentially avoid false signals.
T3 RSI
T3 RSI is a variation of the Relative Strength Index (RSI) technical indicator that incorporates the Tilson T3 for smoothing. Like the regular RSI, the T3 RSI is a momentum oscillator used to measure the speed and change of price movements, and it ranges from 0 to 100. Readings below 30 typically indicate oversold conditions, while readings above 70 indicate overbought conditions.
The T3 RSI aims to improve upon the regular RSI by addressing its limitations, such as lag and false signals. By using the T3, a more responsive and faster RSI can be achieved. Here's a general breakdown of the T3 RSI calculation:
1. Calculate the price change for each period, as well as the absolute value of the change.
2. Apply the T3 smoothing technique to both the price change and its absolute value, separately. This involves calculating two sets of exponential moving averages and combining them to create a double-weighted moving average with reduced lag.
3. Divide the smoothed price change by the smoothed absolute value of the price change.
4. Transform the result into a value ranging from 0 to 100 to obtain the T3 RSI.
The T3 RSI is considered an improvement over the regular RSI because it provides faster and more responsive signals. This can help traders identify overbought and oversold conditions more accurately and potentially avoid false signals.
Jurik RSX
The Jurik RSX is a technical indicator developed by Mark Jurik to measure the momentum and strength of price movements in financial markets, such as stocks, commodities, and currencies. It is an advanced version of the traditional Relative Strength Index (RSI), designed to offer smoother and less lagging signals compared to the standard RSI.
The main advantage of the Jurik RSX is that it provides more accurate and timely signals for traders and analysts, thanks to its improved calculation methods that reduce noise and lag in the indicator's output. This enables better decision-making when analyzing market trends and potential trading opportunities.
What is Adaptive-Lookback Variety RSI
This indicator allows the user to select from 9 different RSI types and 33 source types. The various RSI types is enhanced by injecting an adaptive lookback period into the caculation making the RSI able to adaptive to differing market conditions.
Additional Features
This indicator allows you to select from 33 source types. They are as follows:
Close
Open
High
Low
Median
Typical
Weighted
Average
Average Median Body
Trend Biased
Trend Biased (Extreme)
HA Close
HA Open
HA High
HA Low
HA Median
HA Typical
HA Weighted
HA Average
HA Average Median Body
HA Trend Biased
HA Trend Biased (Extreme)
HAB Close
HAB Open
HAB High
HAB Low
HAB Median
HAB Typical
HAB Weighted
HAB Average
HAB Average Median Body
HAB Trend Biased
HAB Trend Biased (Extreme)
What are Heiken Ashi "better" candles?
Heiken Ashi "better" candles are a modified version of the standard Heiken Ashi candles, which are a popular charting technique used in technical analysis. Heiken Ashi candles help traders identify trends and potential reversal points by smoothing out price data and reducing market noise. The "better formula" was proposed by Sebastian Schmidt in an article published by BNP Paribas in Warrants & Zertifikate, a German magazine, in August 2004. The aim of this formula is to further improve the smoothing of the Heiken Ashi chart and enhance its effectiveness in identifying trends and reversals.
Standard Heiken Ashi candles are calculated using the following formulas:
Heiken Ashi Close = (Open + High + Low + Close) / 4
Heiken Ashi Open = (Previous Heiken Ashi Open + Previous Heiken Ashi Close) / 2
Heiken Ashi High = Max (High, Heiken Ashi Open, Heiken Ashi Close)
Heiken Ashi Low = Min (Low, Heiken Ashi Open, Heiken Ashi Close)
The "better formula" modifies the standard Heiken Ashi calculation by incorporating additional smoothing, which can help reduce noise and make it easier to identify trends and reversals. The modified formulas for Heiken Ashi "better" candles are as follows:
Better Heiken Ashi Close = (Open + High + Low + Close) / 4
Better Heiken Ashi Open = (Previous Better Heiken Ashi Open + Previous Better Heiken Ashi Close) / 2
Better Heiken Ashi High = Max (High, Better Heiken Ashi Open, Better Heiken Ashi Close)
Better Heiken Ashi Low = Min (Low, Better Heiken Ashi Open, Better Heiken Ashi Close)
Smoothing Factor = 2 / (N + 1), where N is the chosen period for smoothing
Smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Open = (Better Heiken Ashi Open * Smoothing Factor) + (Previous Smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Open * (1 - Smoothing Factor))
Smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Close = (Better Heiken Ashi Close * Smoothing Factor) + (Previous Smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Close * (1 - Smoothing Factor))
The smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Open and Close values are then used to calculate the smoothed Better Heiken Ashi High and Low values, resulting in "better" candles that provide a clearer representation of the market trend and potential reversal points.
It's important to note that, like any other technical analysis tool, Heiken Ashi "better" candles are not foolproof and should be used in conjunction with other indicators and analysis techniques to make well-informed trading decisions.
Heiken Ashi "better" candles, as mentioned previously, provide a clearer representation of market trends and potential reversal points by reducing noise and smoothing out price data. When using these candles in conjunction with other technical analysis tools and indicators, traders can gain valuable insights into market behavior and make more informed decisions.
To effectively use Heiken Ashi "better" candles in your trading strategy, consider the following tips:
Trend Identification: Heiken Ashi "better" candles can help you identify the prevailing trend in the market. When the majority of the candles are green (or another color, depending on your chart settings) and there are no or few lower wicks, it may indicate a strong uptrend. Conversely, when the majority of the candles are red (or another color) and there are no or few upper wicks, it may signal a strong downtrend.
Trend Reversals: Look for potential trend reversals when a change in the color of the candles occurs, especially when accompanied by longer wicks. For example, if a green candle with a long lower wick is followed by a red candle, it could indicate a bearish reversal. Similarly, a red candle with a long upper wick followed by a green candle may suggest a bullish reversal.
Support and Resistance: You can use Heiken Ashi "better" candles to identify potential support and resistance levels. When the candles are consistently moving in one direction and then suddenly change color with longer wicks, it could indicate the presence of a support or resistance level.
Stop-Loss and Take-Profit: Using Heiken Ashi "better" candles can help you manage risk by determining optimal stop-loss and take-profit levels. For instance, you can place your stop-loss below the low of the most recent green candle in an uptrend or above the high of the most recent red candle in a downtrend.
Confirming Signals: Heiken Ashi "better" candles should be used in conjunction with other technical indicators, such as moving averages, oscillators, or chart patterns, to confirm signals and improve the accuracy of your analysis.
In this implementation, you have the choice of AMA, KAMA, or T3 smoothing. These are as follows:
Kaufman Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA)
The Kaufman Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) is a type of adaptive moving average used in technical analysis to smooth out price fluctuations and identify trends. The KAMA adjusts its smoothing factor based on the market's volatility, making it more responsive in volatile markets and smoother in calm markets. The KAMA is calculated using three different efficiency ratios that determine the appropriate smoothing factor for the current market conditions. These ratios are based on the noise level of the market, the speed at which the market is moving, and the length of the moving average. The KAMA is a popular choice among traders who prefer to use adaptive indicators to identify trends and potential reversals.
Adaptive Moving Average
The Adaptive Moving Average (AMA) is a type of moving average that adjusts its sensitivity to price movements based on market conditions. It uses a ratio between the current price and the highest and lowest prices over a certain lookback period to determine its level of smoothing. The AMA can help reduce lag and increase responsiveness to changes in trend direction, making it useful for traders who want to follow trends while avoiding false signals. The AMA is calculated by multiplying a smoothing constant with the difference between the current price and the previous AMA value, then adding the result to the previous AMA value.
T3
The T3 moving average is a type of technical indicator used in financial analysis to identify trends in price movements. It is similar to the Exponential Moving Average (EMA) and the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA), but uses a different smoothing algorithm.
The T3 moving average is calculated using a series of exponential moving averages that are designed to filter out noise and smooth the data. The resulting smoothed data is then weighted with a non-linear function to produce a final output that is more responsive to changes in trend direction.
The T3 moving average can be customized by adjusting the length of the moving average, as well as the weighting function used to smooth the data. It is commonly used in conjunction with other technical indicators as part of a larger trading strategy.
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Adaptive-Lookback Variety RSI as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Adaptive-Lookback Variety RSI
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
]█ Setting up the GKD
The GKD system involves chaining indicators together. These are the steps to set this up.
Use a GKD-C indicator alone on a chart
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Use a GKD-V indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Use a GKD-B indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Baseline (Baseline, Backtest)
1. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline"
Volatility/Volume (Volatility/Volume, Backte st)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Solo"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Signal Type" setting to "Crossing" (neither traditional nor both can be backtested)
3. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Volatility/Volume"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, a) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Trading" if using a directional GKD-V indicator; or, b) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full" if using a directional or non-directional GKD-V indicator (non-directional GKD-V can only test Longs and Shorts separately)
6. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Side" to "Long" or "Short
7. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Solo Confirmation Simple (Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
1. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Solo Confirmation Complex without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
6. Import the GKD-C into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Solo Confirmation Complex with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
7. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Full GKD without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
9. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Full GKD with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Import the GKD-C Continuation indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
9. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
10. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Baseline + Volatility/Volume (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, make sure the "Signal Type" setting is set to "Traditional"
3. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
5. Import the GKD-V into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full". For this backtest, you must test Longs and Shorts separately
7. To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you can test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-B Baseline
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Stacked 1: None
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 1
Outputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-BT Backtest or GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Stacked 1: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+ or GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
Komut dosyalarını "stop loss" için ara
[MT Trader] Backtest template w/ Supertrend Strategy---EN: In this strategy template you will find some functions already pre-programmed to be used in your strategies to speed up the programming process, among them we can highlight the default stop loss and take profit functions, which will help to set easily and quickly, defining the price range in which we want to prevent large losses or protect our profits from unexpected market movements.
🔴 Stop Loss: Among the functions of the stop loss are the 4 most known, first we have the fixed percentage range (%) and price ($), when the price reaches this fixed price will limit the losses of the operation avoiding larger losses, then we have the average true range (ATR), a moving average of true range and X period that can give us good reference points to place our stop loss, finally the last point higher or lower is the most used by traders to place their stop loss.
In addition, the price range between the entry and stop loss can be converted into a trailing stop loss.
🟢 Take Profit: We have 3 options for take profit, just like stop loss, the fixed range of percentage(%) and price($), are available, in addition to this we have the 1:# ratio option, which multiplies by X number the range between the entry and stop loss to use it as take profit, perfect for strategies that use ATR or last high/low point for their strategy.
📈 Heikin Ashi Entrys: The heikin ashi entries are trades that are calculated based on heikin ashi candles but their price is executed in Japanese candles, thus avoiding the false results that occur in heikin candlestick charts, making that in certain cases better results are obtained in the strategies that are executed with this option compared to Japanese candlesticks.
📊 Dashboard: A more visual and organized way to see the results and data needed for our strategy.
Feel free to use this template to program your own strategies, if you find bugs or want to request a new feature let me know in the comments or through my telegram @hvert_mt
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
---ES: En esta plantilla de estrategia podrás encontrar algunas funciones ya pre-programadas para ser usadas en tus estrategias para acelerar procesos de programación, entre ellas podemos destacar las funciones por defecto de stop loss y take profit, que ayudaran a establecer de manera fácil y rápida, definiendo los rango de precio en los que queremos prevenirnos de perdidas grandes o proteger nuestras ganancias de movimientos inesperados del mercado.
🔴 Stop Loss: Entre las funciones del stop loss están las 4 más conocidas, en primer lugar tenemos el rango de porcentaje fijo(%) y el precio($), cuando el precio alcance este precio fijo se limitaran las perdidas de la operación evitando perdidas mas grandes, después tenemos el promedio de rango verdadero(ATR), una media móvil del rango verdadero y X periodo que nos puede dar buenos puntos de referencia para colocar nuestro stop loss, por ultimo el ultimo punto mas alto o mas bajo es de los mas usados por los traders para colocar su stop loss.
Adicional a esto, el rango de precio entre la entrada y el stop loss se puede convertir en un trailing stop loss.
🟢 Take Profit: Tenemos 3 opciones para take profit, al igual que en el stop loss, el rango fijo de porcentaje(%) y precio($) se encuentran disponibles, adicional a esto tenemos la opción de ratio 1:#, que multiplica por X numero el rango entre la entrada y el stop loss para usarlo como take profit, perfecto para estrategias que usen ATR o ultimo punto alto/bajo.
📈 Entradas Heikin Ashi: Las entradas Heikin Ashi son trades que son calculados en base a las velas Aeikin Ashi pero su precio esta ejecutado a velas japonesas, evitando así los falsos resultados que se producen en graficas de velas Heikin, esto haciendo que en ciertos casos se obtengan mejores resultados en las estrategias que son ejecutadas con esta opción en comparación con las velas japonesas.
📊 Panel de Control: Una manera mas visual y organizada de ver los resultados y datos necesarios de nuestra estrategia.
Siéntete libre de usar esta plantilla para programar tus propias estrategias, si encuentras errores o quieres solicitar una nueva función házmelo saber en los comentarios o a través de mi Telegram: @hvert_mt
Big Candle Identifier with RSI Divergence and Advanced Stops1. Strategy Objective
The main goal of this strategy is to:
Identify significant price momentum (big candles).
Enter trades at opportune moments based on market signals (candlestick patterns and RSI divergence).
Limit initial risk through a fixed stop loss.
Maximize profits by using a trailing stop that activates only after the trade moves a specified distance in the profitable direction.
2. Components of the Strategy
A. Big Candle Identification
The strategy identifies big candles as indicators of strong momentum.
A big candle is defined as:
The body (absolute difference between close and open) of the current candle (body0) is larger than the bodies of the last five candles.
The candle is:
Bullish Big Candle: If close > open.
Bearish Big Candle: If open > close.
Purpose: Big candles signal potential continuation or reversal of trends, serving as the primary entry trigger.
B. RSI Divergence
Relative Strength Index (RSI): A momentum oscillator used to detect overbought/oversold conditions and divergence.
Fast RSI: A 5-period RSI, which is more sensitive to short-term price movements.
Slow RSI: A 14-period RSI, which smoothens fluctuations over a longer timeframe.
Divergence: The difference between the fast and slow RSIs.
Positive divergence (divergence > 0): Bullish momentum.
Negative divergence (divergence < 0): Bearish momentum.
Visualization: The divergence is plotted on the chart, helping traders confirm momentum shifts.
C. Stop Loss
Initial Stop Loss:
When entering a trade, an immediate stop loss of 200 points is applied.
This stop loss ensures the maximum risk is capped at a predefined level.
Implementation:
Long Trades: Stop loss is set below the entry price at low - 200 points.
Short Trades: Stop loss is set above the entry price at high + 200 points.
Purpose:
Prevents significant losses if the price moves against the trade immediately after entry.
D. Trailing Stop
The trailing stop is a dynamic risk management tool that adjusts with price movements to lock in profits. Here’s how it works:
Activation Condition:
The trailing stop only starts trailing when the trade moves 200 ticks (profit) in the right direction:
Long Position: close - entry_price >= 200 ticks.
Short Position: entry_price - close >= 200 ticks.
Trailing Logic:
Once activated, the trailing stop:
For Long Positions: Trails behind the price by 150 ticks (trail_stop = close - 150 ticks).
For Short Positions: Trails above the price by 150 ticks (trail_stop = close + 150 ticks).
Exit Condition:
The trade exits automatically if the price touches the trailing stop level.
Purpose:
Ensures profits are locked in as the trade progresses while still allowing room for price fluctuations.
E. Trade Entry Logic
Long Entry:
Triggered when a bullish big candle is identified.
Stop loss is set at low - 200 points.
Short Entry:
Triggered when a bearish big candle is identified.
Stop loss is set at high + 200 points.
F. Trade Exit Logic
Trailing Stop: Automatically exits the trade if the price touches the trailing stop level.
Fixed Stop Loss: Exits the trade if the price hits the predefined stop loss level.
G. 21 EMA
The strategy includes a 21-period Exponential Moving Average (EMA), which acts as a trend filter.
EMA helps visualize the overall market direction:
Price above EMA: Indicates an uptrend.
Price below EMA: Indicates a downtrend.
H. Visualization
Big Candle Identification:
The open and close prices of big candles are plotted for easy reference.
Trailing Stop:
Plotted on the chart to visualize its progression during the trade.
Green Line: Indicates the trailing stop for long positions.
Red Line: Indicates the trailing stop for short positions.
RSI Divergence:
Positive divergence is shown in green.
Negative divergence is shown in red.
3. Key Parameters
trail_start_ticks: The number of ticks required before the trailing stop activates (default: 200 ticks).
trail_distance_ticks: The distance between the trailing stop and price once the trailing stop starts (default: 150 ticks).
initial_stop_loss_points: The fixed stop loss in points applied at entry (default: 200 points).
tick_size: Automatically calculates the minimum tick size for the trading instrument.
4. Workflow of the Strategy
Step 1: Entry Signal
The strategy identifies a big candle (bullish or bearish).
If conditions are met, a trade is entered with a fixed stop loss.
Step 2: Initial Risk Management
The trade starts with an initial stop loss of 200 points.
Step 3: Trailing Stop Activation
If the trade moves 200 ticks in the profitable direction:
The trailing stop is activated and follows the price at a distance of 150 ticks.
Step 4: Exit the Trade
The trade is exited if:
The price hits the trailing stop.
The price hits the initial stop loss.
5. Advantages of the Strategy
Risk Management:
The fixed stop loss ensures that losses are capped.
The trailing stop locks in profits after the trade becomes profitable.
Momentum-Based Entries:
The strategy uses big candles as entry triggers, which often indicate strong price momentum.
Divergence Confirmation:
RSI divergence helps validate momentum and avoid false signals.
Dynamic Profit Protection:
The trailing stop adjusts dynamically, allowing the trade to capture larger moves while protecting gains.
6. Ideal Market Conditions
This strategy performs best in:
Trending Markets:
Big candles and momentum signals are more effective in capturing directional moves.
High Volatility:
Larger price swings improve the probability of reaching the trailing stop activation level (200 ticks).
CryptoSignalScanner - DeFib v2 indicatorDESCRIPTION:
The DeFib indicator combines Moving Averages data points, Fibonacci sequence calculations and other methods to help traders make better decisions when it comes to entering and exiting trades at different time intervals. By analyzing these data points, the indicator provides valuable insights into the market trends and helps traders determine optimal moments to enter or exit a trade. Moving Averages helps smooth out price fluctuations over a specified period, providing a clearer picture of the overall market direction. The DeFib indicator uses a mix of these averages and Fibonacci methods to increase its chances of finding good trade opportunities. Whether analyzing short-term trends or longer-term patterns, this indicator assists traders in identifying favorable entry and exit points, thereby supporting more informed and strategic trading decisions.
By using Moving Averages data points based on the Fibonacci Sequence (+ some extra calculations we don't wish to share), we incorporate a unique perspective into the analysis. It helps to identify key levels of interest, potential trend reversals, and areas where price action may align with Fibonacci retracement levels. The Fibonacci Sequence is a mathematical sequence in which each number is the sum of the two preceding numbers (e.g., 0, 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, and so on).
As a result of this information some L1, L2, S1 and S2 labels are printed on the chart. The labels are printed when a candle has been closed. Those labels are an indication when to enter or exit a trade. How to use those labels is described in the section "HOW TO USE" below.
This indicator is versatile and can be used on any timeframe, offering a wide range of features to support traders in their decision-making process. Here are some key aspects of this indicator:
User-Friendly:
Traders can easily customize all the settings according to their preferences, ensuring a personalized trading experience.
Long Signals:
The indicator provides both normal and strong long signals, which assist traders in identifying potential reversals in the market. These signals act as confirmation for traders to consider entering a long position.
Short Signals:
Similarly, the indicator offers normal and strong short signals, helping traders identify and confirm potential market reversals for short positions.
Fibonacci Sequence Calculation:
The calculation of the Long and Short labels is based on the Fibonacci Sequence, a mathematical pattern widely used in technical analysis. This adds a reliable and systematic approach to the indicator's signal generation.
Stop Loss:
When initiating a trade, it is our standard practice to implement a stop loss order based on the stop loss signal derived from the current or preceding candle. These stop loss signals are generated using the Average True Range (ATR) indicator.
Overlays:
The indicator includes overlays that visually represent market trends. These overlays identifying support and resistance levels, and providing valuable insights into the overall market behaviour.
Trend Table Box:
Traders can access a trend table box that displays the prevailing trend across different timeframes. This feature allows traders to assess the trend's strength and consistency. Additionally, users have the flexibility to adjust the timeframes based on their trading preferences.
Long/Short Alerts:
The indicator offers the functionality to add alerts for both long and short positions. Traders can set up notifications to be alerted when specific conditions are met, ensuring they stay informed even when they're not actively monitoring the charts.
Overall, this indicator provides traders with a comprehensive set of tools and features to enhance their trading decisions. Its user-friendly nature, combined with the inclusion of various signals, overlays, trend analysis, and alerts, enables traders to make informed choices and adapt to different market conditions effectively.
HOW TO USE:
This indicator incorporates specific signals that provide valuable insights into potential trend reversals in the market. Here's how each signal type is interpreted:
L1 (Long) Signal:
When an L1 signal appears, it suggests a potential uptrend reversal. Traders should pay attention to this signal as it indicates a possible shift from a downtrend to an uptrend. It serves as an early indication of a potential upward movement in prices. This is the fist point where we can take a long position. If we want to invest $100 into this trade we invest a maximum of $50 at this point. Don't forget to put a stop loss as described below in the "STOP LOSS" section.
L2 (Long) Signal:
An L2 signal acts as confirmation of the potential uptrend reversal identified by the L1 signal. When an L2 signal emerges, it strengthens the case for an upcoming uptrend. Traders may consider this signal as a stronger indication to support their decision to enter a long position. This is the point where we can invest another $50 if we already invested on the L1 signal. If we did not invested yet and we still see a clear reversal we enter the trade here with $100. Don't forget to put a stop loss as described below in the "STOP LOSS" section.
S1 (Short) Signal:
When an S1 signal is generated, it suggests a potential downtrend reversal. Traders should take note of this signal as it indicates a possible shift from an uptrend to a downtrend. It serves as an early indication of a potential downward movement in prices. This is the fist point where we can take a short position. If we want to invest $100 into this trade we invest a maximum of $50 at this point. Don't forget to put a stop loss as described below in the "STOP LOSS" section.
S2 (Short) Signal:
An S2 signal confirms the potential downtrend reversal identified by the S1 signal. When an S2 signal emerges, it reinforces the likelihood of an upcoming downtrend. Traders may consider this signal as a stronger indication to support their decision to enter a short position. This is the point where we can invest another $50 if we already invested on the S1 signal. If we did not invested yet and we still see a clear reversal we enter the trade here with $100. Don't forget to put a stop loss as described below in the "STOP LOSS" section.
These signals provide traders with a systematic framework to identify and evaluate potential reversals in market trends. By combining the information provided by both the L1 and L2 signals (for uptrends) or the S1 and S2 signals (for downtrends), traders can gain more confidence in their assessments of trend reversals. This indicator offers traders a valuable tool to capitalize on these reversal opportunities and make more informed trading decisions.
It is important to exercise caution and avoid blindly following the signals generated by the indicator. Instead, it is recommended to seek additional confirmations from other technical indicators such as the RSI (Relative Strength Index), MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), or any other indicators that you are familiar with and trust.
While the signals provided by the indicator can be a useful starting point, relying solely on them may not always guarantee accurate predictions. By considering other technical indicators, traders can gain a more comprehensive view of the market conditions and validate the signals received from the indicator.
The RSI is a popular momentum oscillator that measures the speed and change of price movements. It helps traders identify overbought and oversold conditions, giving insights into potential trend reversals. The MACD, on the other hand, combines moving averages to provide signals for trend identification, as well as momentum and divergence analysis.
By utilizing these additional indicators or any others that you are familiar with, you can confirm the signals generated by the indicator under consideration. This approach enhances the reliability of your trading decisions by adding another layer of analysis and reducing the potential for false signals.
Each trader may have their preferred set of technical indicators based on their trading style and experience. It is important to select indicators that align with your trading strategy and complement the signals received from the indicator in question. This way, you can make more informed and well-rounded trading decisions, increasing the probability of successful trades and minimizing potential risks.
Stop Loss:
When initiating a trade, it is our standard practice to implement a stop loss order based on the stop loss signal derived from the current or preceding candle. These stop loss signals are generated using the Average True Range (ATR) indicator.
By employing a stop loss order, we aim to limit potential losses in case the trade moves against our anticipated direction. The stop loss signal, determined from the current or previous candle, provides a specific level at which the stop loss order is placed.
The Average True Range indicator is utilized to gauge the volatility of the market and determine an appropriate stop loss level. It takes into account the price range of the asset over a defined period, considering both high and low price points. By using the ATR, we can identify an optimal stop loss level that accounts for the asset's recent price fluctuations.
Implementing a stop loss based on the ATR-derived signal adds a layer of risk management to our trading strategy. It helps mitigate potential losses by automatically triggering the stop loss order if the price reaches or exceeds the predetermined level. This approach allows us to protect our capital and minimize the impact of adverse price movements.
It is important to note that the ATR-based stop loss signals should be used in conjunction with other analysis techniques and indicators. They serve as a dynamic reference point that considers market volatility, ensuring the stop loss level is adjusted accordingly.
By incorporating stop loss orders based on the stop loss signals derived from the current or previous candle using the ATR indicator, we aim to safeguard our trades and manage risk effectively. However, it is important to continually monitor and adjust the stop loss level as market conditions evolve, adhering to our risk management strategy throughout the duration of the trade.
Candlestick Sequence:
The Candlestick Sequence is a calculation used to identify potential trend reversal points in the financial markets. It consists of two main components, the Candlestick Sequence and the Candlestick Reversal. The Candlestick Sequence and Candlestick Reversal offer a structured way to identify potential reversals in the market.
WARNING:
• It is not advisable to engage in Leverage Trading unless you possess chart reading skills.
• It is not advisable to engage in Leverage Trading unless you are capable of interpreting technical indicators such as RSI, Moving Average, MACD, and others.
• It is crucial not to blindly follow trading signals without conducting your own analysis (DYOR - Do Your Own Research).
• Avoid succumbing to FOMO (Fear Of Missing Out) and impulsively entering trades. If you miss an entry point, it is important to let it go and patiently wait for the next potential entry point.
Leverage trading involves trading with borrowed funds, which amplifies both potential profits and losses. To participate in this form of trading, it is imperative to possess a certain level of expertise and knowledge. One key requirement is the ability to read and analyze charts effectively. Chart reading involves understanding various chart patterns, price movements, and support and resistance levels, among other factors. Without this skill, it can be challenging to make informed decisions and manage risk appropriately.
Additionally, leverage trading relies on technical indicators to identify potential trading opportunities and gauge market conditions. It is essential to have the ability to interpret indicators such as RSI, Moving Average, MACD, and others, as they provide valuable insights into market trends, momentum, and potential reversals. Ignoring or misunderstanding these indicators can lead to incorrect trading decisions and increased risk exposure.
Moreover, it is crucial not to blindly rely solely on trading signals, including those generated by indicators or other sources. While signals can be helpful, they should always be complemented by conducting one's own analysis. This entails conducting thorough research, considering multiple factors, and validating the signals with additional indicators or technical analysis techniques. This approach helps in making more informed and well-rounded trading decisions.
Finally, FOMO can be a detrimental emotion that drives impulsive and irrational trading behavior. It is important to avoid entering trades solely because of the fear of missing out on potential profits. If an entry point is missed, it is recommended to exercise patience and discipline by waiting for the next suitable opportunity. This approach helps to avoid unnecessary risks and maintain a more strategic and calculated trading approach.
By adhering to these warnings and taking the necessary precautions, traders can approach leverage trading more responsibly and increase their chances of success while mitigating potential losses.
REMARKS:
• It is important to emphasize that any information or content you encounter here is not intended as financial advice. We want to make it clear that we are not authorized or qualified to provide personalized investment advice. Our content, including ideas, opinions, views, predictions, forecasts, commentaries, suggestions, or stock picks, should be viewed strictly as informational, entertaining, or educational material.
• We emphasize that you should not construe the information provided here as personal investment advice or as a recommendation to take specific investment actions. It is crucial to conduct your own research, consider your individual financial circumstances, and consult with a qualified financial professional before making any investment decisions.
• While we aim to provide accurate and reliable information, we cannot guarantee the absence of errors or inaccuracies. Therefore, it is recommended to independently verify any information provided and exercise your own judgment when using it for decision-making purposes.
• Please be aware that any actions you take based on the information found here are done so at your own risk. We disclaim any liability for the consequences of your actions or decisions stemming from the information presented.
• Our intention is to provide helpful information that can contribute to your overall understanding and assist you in making better-informed decisions. However, it is essential to exercise caution, seek professional advice, and take responsibility for your investment choices.
Cheers & Good luck.
Uptrick: RSI Histogram
1. **Introduction to the RSI and Moving Averages**
2. **Detailed Breakdown of the Uptrick: RSI Histogram**
3. **Calculation and Formula**
4. **Visual Representation**
5. **Customization and User Settings**
6. **Trading Strategies and Applications**
7. **Risk Management**
8. **Case Studies and Examples**
9. **Comparison with Other Indicators**
10. **Advanced Usage and Tips**
---
## 1. Introduction to the RSI and Moving Averages
### **1.1 Relative Strength Index (RSI)**
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) is a momentum oscillator developed by J. Welles Wilder and introduced in his 1978 book "New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems." It is widely used in technical analysis to measure the speed and change of price movements.
**Purpose of RSI:**
- **Identify Overbought/Oversold Conditions:** RSI values range from 0 to 100. Traditionally, values above 70 are considered overbought, while values below 30 are considered oversold. These thresholds help traders identify potential reversal points in the market.
- **Trend Strength Measurement:** RSI also indicates the strength of a trend. High RSI values suggest strong bullish momentum, while low values indicate bearish momentum.
**Calculation of RSI:**
1. **Calculate the Average Gain and Loss:** Over a specified period (e.g., 14 days), calculate the average gain and loss.
2. **Compute the Relative Strength (RS):** RS is the ratio of average gain to average loss.
3. **RSI Formula:** RSI = 100 - (100 / (1 + RS))
### **1.2 Moving Averages (MA)**
Moving Averages are used to smooth out price data and identify trends by filtering out short-term fluctuations. Two common types are:
**Simple Moving Average (SMA):** The average of prices over a specified number of periods.
**Exponential Moving Average (EMA):** A type of moving average that gives more weight to recent prices, making it more responsive to recent price changes.
**Smoothed Moving Average (SMA):** Used to reduce the impact of volatility and provide a clearer view of the underlying trend. The RMA, or Running Moving Average, used in the USH script is similar to an EMA but based on the average of RSI values.
## 2. Detailed Breakdown of the Uptrick: RSI Histogram
### **2.1 Indicator Overview**
The Uptrick: RSI Histogram (USH) is a technical analysis tool that combines the RSI with a moving average to create a histogram that reflects momentum and trend strength.
**Key Components:**
- **RSI Calculation:** Determines the relative strength of price movements.
- **Moving Average Application:** Smooths the RSI values to provide a clearer trend indication.
- **Histogram Plotting:** Visualizes the deviation of the smoothed RSI from a neutral level.
### **2.2 Indicator Purpose**
The primary purpose of the USH is to provide a clear visual representation of the market's momentum and trend strength. It helps traders identify:
- **Bullish and Bearish Trends:** By showing how far the smoothed RSI is from the neutral 50 level.
- **Potential Reversal Points:** By highlighting changes in momentum.
### **2.3 Indicator Design**
**RSI Moving Average (RSI MA):** The RSI MA is a smoothed version of the RSI, calculated using a running moving average. This smooths out short-term fluctuations and provides a clearer indication of the underlying trend.
**Histogram Calculation:**
- **Neutral Level:** The histogram is plotted relative to the neutral level of 50. This level represents a balanced market where neither bulls nor bears have dominance.
- **Histogram Values:** The histogram bars show the difference between the RSI MA and the neutral level. Positive values indicate bullish momentum, while negative values indicate bearish momentum.
## 3. Calculation and Formula
### **3.1 RSI Calculation**
The RSI calculation involves:
1. **Average Gain and Loss:** Calculated over the specified length (e.g., 14 periods).
2. **Relative Strength (RS):** RS = Average Gain / Average Loss.
3. **RSI Formula:** RSI = 100 - (100 / (1 + RS)).
### **3.2 Moving Average Calculation**
For the USH indicator, the RSI is smoothed using a running moving average (RMA). The RMA formula is similar to that of the EMA but is based on averaging RSI values over the specified length.
### **3.3 Histogram Calculation**
The histogram value is calculated as:
- **Histogram Value = RSI MA - 50**
**Plotting the Histogram:**
- **Positive Histogram Values:** Indicate that the RSI MA is above the neutral level, suggesting bullish momentum.
- **Negative Histogram Values:** Indicate that the RSI MA is below the neutral level, suggesting bearish momentum.
## 4. Visual Representation
### **4.1 Histogram Bars**
The histogram is plotted as bars on the chart:
- **Bullish Bars:** Colored green when the RSI MA is above 50.
- **Bearish Bars:** Colored red when the RSI MA is below 50.
### **4.2 Customization Options**
Traders can customize:
- **RSI Length:** Adjust the length of the RSI calculation to match their trading style.
- **Bull and Bear Colors:** Choose colors for histogram bars to enhance visual clarity.
### **4.3 Interpretation**
**Bullish Signal:** A histogram bar that moves from red to green indicates a potential shift to a bullish trend.
**Bearish Signal:** A histogram bar that moves from green to red indicates a potential shift to a bearish trend.
## 5. Customization and User Settings
### **5.1 Adjusting RSI Length**
The length parameter determines the number of periods over which the RSI is calculated and smoothed. Shorter lengths make the RSI more sensitive to price changes, while longer lengths provide a smoother view of trends.
### **5.2 Color Settings**
Traders can adjust:
- **Bull Color:** Color of histogram bars indicating bullish momentum.
- **Bear Color:** Color of histogram bars indicating bearish momentum.
**Customization Benefits:**
- **Visual Clarity:** Traders can choose colors that stand out against their chart’s background.
- **Personal Preference:** Adjust settings to match individual trading styles and preferences.
## 6. Trading Strategies and Applications
### **6.1 Trend Following**
**Identifying Entry Points:**
- **Bullish Entry:** When the histogram changes from red to green, it signals a potential entry point for long positions.
- **Bearish Entry:** When the histogram changes from green to red, it signals a potential entry point for short positions.
**Trend Confirmation:** The histogram helps confirm the strength of a trend. Strong, consistent green bars indicate robust bullish momentum, while strong, consistent red bars indicate robust bearish momentum.
### **6.2 Swing Trading**
**Momentum Analysis:**
- **Entry Signals:** Look for significant shifts in the histogram to time entries. A shift from bearish to bullish (red to green) indicates potential for upward movement.
- **Exit Signals:** A shift from bullish to bearish (green to red) suggests a potential weakening of the trend, signaling an exit or reversal point.
### **6.3 Range Trading**
**Market Conditions:**
- **Consolidation:** The histogram close to zero suggests a range-bound market. Traders can use this information to identify support and resistance levels.
- **Breakout Potential:** A significant move away from the neutral level may indicate a potential breakout from the range.
### **6.4 Risk Management**
**Stop-Loss Placement:**
- **Bullish Positions:** Place stop-loss orders below recent support levels when the histogram is green.
- **Bearish Positions:** Place stop-loss orders above recent resistance levels when the histogram is red.
**Position Sizing:** Adjust position sizes based on the strength of the histogram signals. Strong trends (indicated by larger histogram bars) may warrant larger positions, while weaker signals suggest smaller positions.
## 7. Risk Management
### **7.1 Importance of Risk Management**
Effective risk management is crucial for long-term trading success. It involves protecting capital, managing losses, and optimizing trade setups.
### **7.2 Using USH for Risk Management**
**Stop-Loss and Take-Profit Levels:**
- **Stop-Loss Orders:** Use the histogram to set stop-loss levels based on trend strength. For instance, place stops below support levels in bullish trends and above resistance levels in bearish trends.
- **Take-Profit Targets:** Adjust take-profit levels based on histogram changes. For example, lock in profits as the histogram starts to shift from green to red.
**Position Sizing:**
- **Trend Strength:** Scale position sizes based on the strength of histogram signals. Larger histogram bars indicate stronger trends, which may justify larger positions.
- **Volatility:** Consider market volatility and adjust position sizes to mitigate risk.
## 8. Case Studies and Examples
### **8.1 Example 1: Bullish Trend**
**Scenario:** A trader notices a transition from red to green histogram bars.
**Analysis:**
- **Entry Point:** The transition indicates a potential bullish trend. The trader decides to enter a long position.
- **Stop-Loss:** Set stop-loss below recent support levels.
- **Take-Profit:** Consider taking profits as the histogram moves back towards zero or turns red.
**Outcome:** The bullish trend continues, and the histogram remains green, providing a profitable trade setup.
### **8.2 Example 2: Bearish Trend**
**Scenario:** A trader observes a transition from green to red histogram bars.
**Analysis:**
- **Entry Point:** The transition suggests a potential
bearish trend. The trader decides to enter a short position.
- **Stop-Loss:** Set stop-loss above recent resistance levels.
- **Take-Profit:** Consider taking profits as the histogram approaches zero or shifts to green.
**Outcome:** The bearish trend continues, and the histogram remains red, resulting in a successful trade.
## 9. Comparison with Other Indicators
### **9.1 RSI vs. USH**
**RSI:** Measures momentum and identifies overbought/oversold conditions.
**USH:** Builds on RSI by incorporating a moving average and histogram to provide a clearer view of trend strength and momentum.
### **9.2 RSI vs. MACD**
**MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence):** A trend-following momentum indicator that uses moving averages to identify changes in trend direction.
**Comparison:**
- **USH:** Provides a smoothed RSI perspective and visual histogram for trend strength.
- **MACD:** Offers signals based on the convergence and divergence of moving averages.
### **9.3 RSI vs. Stochastic Oscillator**
**Stochastic Oscillator:** Measures the level of the closing price relative to the high-low range over a specified period.
**Comparison:**
- **USH:** Focuses on smoothed RSI values and histogram representation.
- **Stochastic Oscillator:** Provides overbought/oversold signals and potential reversals based on price levels.
## 10. Advanced Usage and Tips
### **10.1 Combining Indicators**
**Multi-Indicator Strategies:** Combine the USH with other technical indicators (e.g., Moving Averages, Bollinger Bands) for a comprehensive trading strategy.
**Confirmation Signals:** Use the USH to confirm signals from other indicators. For instance, a bullish histogram combined with a moving average crossover may provide a stronger buy signal.
### **10.2 Customization Tips**
**Adjust RSI Length:** Experiment with different RSI lengths to match various market conditions and trading styles.
**Color Preferences:** Choose histogram colors that enhance visibility and align with personal preferences.
### **10.3 Continuous Learning**
**Backtesting:** Regularly backtest the USH with historical data to refine strategies and improve accuracy.
**Education:** Stay updated with trading education and adapt strategies based on market changes and personal experiences.
Luxmi AI Filtered Option Scalping Signals (INDEX)Introduction:
Luxmi AI Filtered Option Scalping Signals (INDEX) is an enhanced iteration of the Luxmi AI Directional Option Buying (Long Only) indicator. It's designed for use on index charts alongside the Luxmi AI Smart Sentimeter (INDEX) indicator to enhance performance. This indicator aims to provide refined signals for option scalping strategies, optimizing trading decisions within index markets.
Understanding directional bias is crucial when trading index and index options because it helps traders align their strategies with the expected movement of the underlying index.
The Luxmi AI Filtered Option Scalping Signals (INDEX) indicator aims to simplify and expedite decision-making through comprehensive technical analysis of various data points on a chart. By leveraging advanced analysis of data points, this indicator scrutinizes multiple factors simultaneously to offer traders clear and rapid insights into market dynamics.
The indicator is specifically designed for option scalping, a trading strategy that aims to profit from short-term price fluctuations. It prioritizes signals that are conducive to quick execution and capitalizes on rapid market movements typical of scalping strategies.
Major Features:
Trend Cloud:
Working Principle:
The script utilizes the Relative Strength Index (RSI) to assess market momentum, identifying bullish and bearish phases based on RSI readings. It calculates two boolean variables, bullmove and bearmove, which signal shifts in momentum direction by considering changes in the Exponential Moving Average (EMA) of the closing price. When RSI indicates bullish momentum and the closing price's EMA exhibits positive changes, bullmove is triggered, signifying the start of a bullish phase. Conversely, when RSI suggests bearish momentum and the closing price's EMA shows negative changes, bearmove is activated, marking the beginning of a bearish phase. This systematic approach helps in understanding the current trend of the price. The script visually emphasizes these phases on the chart using plot shape markers, providing traders with clear indications of trend shifts.
Benefits of Using Trend Cloud:
Comprehensive Momentum Assessment: The script offers a holistic view of market momentum by incorporating RSI readings and changes in the closing price's EMA, enabling traders to identify both bullish and bearish phases effectively.
Structured Trend Recognition: With the calculation of boolean variables, the script provides a structured approach to recognizing shifts in momentum direction, enhancing traders' ability to interpret market dynamics.
Visual Clarity: Plotshape markers visually highlight the start and end of bullish and bearish phases on the chart, facilitating easy identification of trend shifts and helping traders to stay informed.
Prompt Response: Traders can promptly react to changing market conditions as the script triggers alerts when bullish or bearish phases begin, allowing them to seize potential trading opportunities swiftly.
Informed Decision-Making: By integrating various indicators and visual cues, the script enables traders to make well-informed decisions and adapt their strategies according to prevailing market sentiment, ultimately enhancing their trading performance.
How to use this feature:
The most effective way to maximize the benefits of this feature is to use it in conjunction with other key indicators and visual cues. By combining the color-coded clouds, which indicate bullish and bearish sentiment, with other features such as IS candles, microtrend candles, volume candles, and sentimeter candles, traders can gain a comprehensive understanding of market dynamics. For instance, aligning the color of the clouds with the trend direction indicated by IS candles, microtrend candles, and sentimeter candles can provide confirmation of trend strength or potential reversals.
Furthermore, traders can leverage the trend cloud as a trailing stop-loss tool for long entries, enhancing risk management strategies. By adjusting the stop-loss level based on the color of the cloud, traders can trail their positions to capture potential profits while minimizing losses. For long entries, maintaining the position as long as the cloud remains green can help traders stay aligned with the prevailing bullish sentiment. Conversely, a shift in color from green to red serves as a signal to exit the position, indicating a potential reversal in market sentiment and minimizing potential losses. This integration of the trend cloud as a trailing stop-loss mechanism adds an additional layer of risk management to trading strategies, increasing the likelihood of successful trades while reducing exposure to adverse market movements.
Moreover, the red cloud serves as an indicator of decay in option premiums and potential theta effect, particularly relevant for options traders. When the cloud turns red, it suggests a decline in option prices and an increase in theta decay, highlighting the importance of managing options positions accordingly. Traders may consider adjusting their options strategies, such as rolling positions or closing out contracts, to mitigate the impact of theta decay and preserve capital. By incorporating this insight into options pricing dynamics, traders can make more informed decisions about their options trades.
Scalping Cloud:
The scalping cloud serves as a specialized component within the trend cloud feature, specifically designed to pinpoint potential long and short entry points within the overarching trend cloud. Here's how it works:
Trend Identification: The trend cloud feature typically highlights the prevailing trend direction based on various technical indicators, price action, or other criteria. It visually represents the momentum and direction of the market over a given period.
Refined Entry Signals: Within this broader trend context, the scalping cloud narrows its focus to identify shorter-term trading opportunities. It does this by analyzing more granular price movements and shorter timeframes, seeking out potential entry points that align with the larger trend.
Long and Short Entries: The scalping cloud distinguishes between potential long (buy) and short (sell) entry opportunities within the trend cloud. For instance, within an uptrend indicated by the trend cloud, the scalping cloud might identify brief retracements or pullbacks as potential long entry points. Conversely, in a downtrend, it may signal short entry opportunities during temporary upward corrections.
Risk Management: By identifying potential entry points within the context of the trend, the scalping cloud also aids in risk management. Traders can use these signals to place stop-loss orders and manage their positions effectively, reducing the risk of adverse price movements.
The scalping cloud operates by analyzing the crossover and crossunder events between two key indicators: the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA) and a Weighted Average. Here's how it works:
Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA): DEMA is a type of moving average that seeks to reduce lag by applying a double smoothing technique to price data. It responds more quickly to price changes compared to traditional moving averages, making it suitable for identifying short-term trends and potential trading opportunities.
Weighted Average: The weighted average calculates the average price of an asset over a specified period. However, it incorporates a weighting scheme that assigns more significance to recent price data, resulting in a more responsive indicator that closely tracks current market trends.
CE and NO CE Signals:
CE signals typically represent a Long Scalping Opportunity, suggesting that conditions are favorable for entering a long position. These signals indicate a strong upward momentum in the market, which traders can exploit for short-term gains through scalping strategies.
On the other hand, when there are no CE signals present, it doesn't necessarily mean that the trend has reversed or turned bearish. Instead, it indicates that the trend is still bullish, but the market is experiencing an active pullback. During a pullback, prices may temporarily retreat from recent highs as traders take profits or reevaluate their positions. While the overall trend remains upward, the pullback introduces a degree of uncertainty, making it less favorable for entering new long positions.
In such a scenario, traders may opt to exercise caution and refrain from entering new long positions until the pullback phase has concluded. Instead, they might consider waiting for confirmation signals, such as the resumption of CE signals or other bullish indications, before reengaging in long positions.
PE and NO PE Signals:
PE signals typically indicate a Short Entry opportunity, signaling that market conditions are conducive to entering a short position.
Conversely, when there are no PE signals present, it signifies that while the trend remains bearish, the market is currently in an active phase of consolidation or pullback. During such periods, prices may temporarily rise from recent lows, reflecting a pause in the downward momentum. While the overall trend remains downward, the absence of PE signals suggests that it may not be an optimal time to enter new short positions.
In this context, traders may exercise caution and wait for clearer signals before initiating new short positions. They might monitor the market closely for signs of a resumption in bearish momentum, such as the emergence of PE signals or other bearish indications. Alternatively, traders may choose to wait on the sidelines until market conditions stabilize or provide clearer directional signals.
Working Principle Of CE and PE Signals:
The feature calculates candlestick values based on the open, high, low, and close prices of each bar. By comparing these derived candlestick values, it determines whether the current candlestick is bullish or bearish. Additionally, it signals when there is a change in the color (bullish or bearish) of the derived candlesticks compared to the previous bar, enabling traders to identify potential shifts in market sentiment.
Micro Trend Candles:
Working Principle:
This feature begins by initializing variables to determine trend channel width and track price movements. Average True Range (ATR) is then calculated to measure market volatility, influencing the channel's size. Highs and lows are identified within a specified range, and trends are assessed based on price breaches, with potential changes signaled accordingly. The price channel is continually updated to adapt to market shifts, and arrows are placed to indicate potential entry points. Colors are assigned to represent bullish and bearish trends, dynamically adjusting based on current market conditions. Finally, candles on the chart are colored to visually depict the identified micro trend, offering traders an intuitive way to interpret market sentiment and potential entry opportunities.
Benefits of using Micro Trend Candles:
Traders can use these identified micro trends to spot potential short-term trading opportunities. For example:
Trend Following: Traders may decide to enter trades aligned with the prevailing micro trend. If the candles are consistently colored in a certain direction, traders may consider entering positions in that direction.
Reversals: Conversely, if the script signals a potential reversal by changing the candle colors, traders may anticipate trend reversals and adjust their trading strategies accordingly. For instance, they might close existing positions or enter new positions in anticipation of a trend reversal.
It's important to note that these micro trends are short-term in nature and may not always align with broader market trends. Therefore, traders utilizing this script should consider their trading timeframes and adjust their strategies accordingly.
How to use this feature:
This feature assigns colors to candles to represent bullish and bearish trends, with adjustments made based on current market conditions. Green candles accompanied by a green trend cloud signal a potential long entry, while red candles suggest caution, indicating a bearish trend. This visual representation allows traders to interpret market sentiment intuitively, identifying optimal entry points and exercising caution during potential downtrends.
Scalping Candles (Inspired by Elliott Wave and Open Interest Concepts):
Working Principle:
This feature draws inspiration from the Elliot Wave method, utilizing technical analysis techniques to discern potential market trends and sentiment shifts. It begins by calculating the variance between two Exponential Moving Averages (EMAs) of closing prices, mimicking Elliot Wave's focus on wave and trend analysis. The shorter-term EMA captures immediate price momentum, while the longer-term EMA reflects broader market trends. A smoother Exponential Moving Average (EMA) line, derived from the difference between these EMAs, aids in identifying short-term trend shifts or momentum reversals.
Benefits of using Scalping Candles Inspired by Elliott Wave:
The Elliott Wave principle is a form of technical analysis that attempts to predict future price movements by identifying patterns in market charts. It suggests that markets move in repetitive waves or cycles, and traders can potentially profit by recognizing these patterns.
While this script does not explicitly analyze Elliot Wave patterns, it is inspired by the principle's emphasis on trend analysis and market sentiment. By calculating and visualizing the difference between EMAs and assigning colors to candles based on this analysis, the script aims to provide traders with insights into potential market sentiment shifts, which can align with the broader philosophy of Elliott Wave analysis.
How to use this feature:
Candlestick colors are assigned based on the relationship between the EMA line and the variance. When the variance is below or equal to the EMA line, candles are colored red, suggesting a bearish sentiment. Conversely, when the variance is above the EMA line, candles are tinted green, indicating a bullish outlook. Though not explicitly analyzing Elliot Wave patterns, the script aligns with its principles of trend analysis and market sentiment interpretation. By offering visual cues on sentiment shifts, it provides traders with insights into potential trading opportunities, echoing Elliot Wave's emphasis on pattern recognition and trend analysis.
Chart Timeframe Support and Resistance:
Working Principle:
This feature serves to identify and visualize support and resistance levels on the chart, primarily based on the chosen Chart Timeframe (CTF). It allows users to specify parameters such as the number of bars considered on the left and right sides of each pivot point, as well as line width and label color. Moreover, users have the option to enable or disable the display of these levels. By utilizing functions to calculate pivot highs and lows within the specified timeframe, the script determines the highest high and lowest low surrounding each pivot point.
Additionally, it defines functions to create lines and labels for each detected support and resistance level. Notably, this feature incorporates a trading method that emphasizes the concept of resistance turning into support after breakouts, thereby providing valuable insights for traders employing such strategies. These lines are drawn on the chart, with colors indicating whether the level is above or below the current close price, aiding traders in visualizing key levels and making informed trading decisions.
Benefits of Chart Timeframe Support and Resistance:
Identification of Price Levels: Support and resistance levels help traders identify significant price levels where buying (support) and selling (resistance) pressure may intensify. These levels are often formed based on historical price movements and are regarded as areas of interest for traders.
Decision Making: Support and resistance levels assist traders in making informed trading decisions. By observing price reactions near these levels, traders can gauge market sentiment and adjust their strategies accordingly. For example, traders may choose to enter or exit positions, set stop-loss orders, or take profit targets based on price behavior around these levels.
Risk Management: Support and resistance levels aid in risk management by providing reference points for setting stop-loss orders. Traders often place stop-loss orders below support levels for long positions and above resistance levels for short positions to limit potential losses if the market moves against them.
How to use this feature:
Planning Long Positions: When considering long positions, it's advantageous to strategize when the price is in proximity to a support level identified by the script. This suggests a potential area of buying interest where traders may expect a bounce or reversal in price. Additionally, confirm the bullish bias by ensuring that the trend cloud is green, indicating favorable market conditions for long trades.
Waiting for Breakout: If long signals are generated near resistance levels detected by the script, exercise patience and wait for a breakout above the resistance. A breakout above resistance signifies potential strength in the upward momentum and may present a more opportune moment to enter long positions. This approach aligns with trading methodologies that emphasize confirmation of bullish momentum before initiating trades.
StopLoss and Target Lines:
In addition to generating entry signals, this indicator also incorporates predefined stop-loss ray lines and configurable risk-reward (R:R) target lines to enhance risk management and profit-taking strategies. Here's how these features work:
Predefined Stop-loss Ray Lines: The indicator automatically plots stop-loss ray lines on the chart, serving as visual guidelines for setting stop-loss levels. These stop-loss lines are predetermined based on specific criteria, such as volatility levels, support and resistance zones, or predefined risk parameters. Traders can use these lines as reference points to place their stop-loss orders, aiming to limit potential losses if the market moves against their position.
Configurable Risk-Reward (R:R) Target Lines: In addition to stop-loss lines, the indicator allows traders to set configurable risk-reward (R:R) target lines on the chart. These target lines represent predefined price levels where traders intend to take profits based on their desired risk-reward ratio. By adjusting the placement of these lines, traders can customize their risk-reward ratios according to their trading preferences and risk tolerance.
Risk Management: The predefined stop-loss ray lines help traders manage risk by providing clear exit points if the trade goes against their expectations. By adhering to these predetermined stop-loss levels, traders can minimize potential losses and protect their trading capital, thereby enhancing overall risk management.
Profit-taking Strategy: On the other hand, the configurable R:R target lines assist traders in establishing profit-taking strategies. By setting target levels based on their desired risk-reward ratio, traders can aim to capture profits at predefined price levels that offer favorable risk-reward profiles. This allows traders to systematically take profits while ensuring that potential gains outweigh potential losses over the long term.
The stop-loss and target lines incorporated in this indicator are dynamic in nature, providing traders with the flexibility to utilize them as trailing stop-loss and extended take-profit targets. Here's how these dynamic features work:
Trailing Stop-loss: Traders can employ the stop-loss lines as trailing stop-loss levels, allowing them to adjust their stop-loss orders as the market moves in their favor. As the price continues to move in the desired direction, indicator can dynamically adjust the stop-loss line to lock in profits while still allowing room for potential further gains. This trailing stop-loss mechanism helps traders secure profits while allowing their winning trades to continue running as long as the market remains favorable.
Extended Take Profit Targets: Similarly, traders can utilize the target lines as extended take-profit targets, enabling them to capture additional profits beyond their initial profit targets. By adjusting the placement of these target lines based on evolving market conditions or technical signals, traders can extend their profit-taking strategy to capitalize on potential price extensions or trend continuations. This flexibility allows traders to maximize their profit potential by capturing larger price movements while managing their risk effectively.
Rangebound Bars:
When the Rangebound Bars feature is enabled, the indicator represents candles in a distinct purple color to visually denote periods of sideways or range-bound price action. This visual cue helps traders easily identify when the market is consolidating and lacking clear directional momentum. Here's how it works:
Purple Candle Color: When the Rangebound Bars feature is active, the indicator displays candlesticks in a purple color to highlight periods of sideways price movement. This color differentiation stands out against the usual colors used for bullish (e.g., green or white) and bearish (e.g., red or black) candles, making it easier for traders to recognize range-bound conditions at a glance.
Signaling Sideways Price Action: The purple coloration of candles indicates that price movements are confined within a relatively narrow range and lack a clear upward or downward trend. This may occur when the market is consolidating, experiencing indecision, or undergoing a period of accumulation or distribution.
Working Principle:
The Rangebound Bars feature of this indicator is designed to assist traders in identifying and navigating consolidating market conditions, where price movements are confined within a relatively narrow range. This feature utilizes Pivot levels and the Average True Range (ATR) concept to determine when the market is range-bound and provides signals to stay out of such price action. Here's how it works:
Pivot Levels: Pivot levels are key price levels derived from the previous period's high, low, and closing prices. They serve as potential support and resistance levels and are widely used by traders to identify significant price levels where price action may stall or reverse. The Rangebound Bars feature incorporates Pivot levels into its analysis to identify ranges where price tends to consolidate.
Average True Range (ATR): The Average True Range is a measure of market volatility that calculates the average range between the high and low prices over a specified period. It provides traders with insights into the level of price volatility and helps set appropriate stop-loss and take-profit levels. In the context of the Rangebound Bars feature, ATR is used to gauge the extent of price fluctuations within the identified range.
RunRox - Backtesting System (SM)RunRox - Backtesting System (SM) is designed for flexible and comprehensive testing of trading strategies, closely integrated with our RunRox - Signals Master indicator. This combination enhances your ability to refine strategies efficiently, providing you with insights to adapt and optimize your trading tactics seamlessly.
The Backtesting System (SM) excels in pinpointing the optimal settings for the RunRox - Signals Master indicator, efficiently highlighting the most effective configurations.
Capabilities of the Backtesting System (SM)
Optimal Settings Determination: Identifies the best configurations for the Signals Master indicator to enhance its effectiveness.
Timeframe-Specific Strategy Testing: Allows strategies to be tested over specific historical time periods to assess their viability.
Customizable Initial Conditions: Enables setting of initial deposit, risk per trade, and commission rates to mirror real-world trading conditions.
Flexible Money Management: Provides options to set take profits and stop losses, optimizing potential returns and risk management.
Intuitive Dashboard: Features a user-friendly dashboard that visually displays all pertinent information, making it easy to analyze and adjust strategies.
Trading Flexibility Across Three Modes:
Dual-Direction Trading: Engage in both buying and selling with this mode. Our dashboard optimizes and identifies the best settings for trading in two directions, streamlining the process to maximize effectiveness for both buy and sell orders.
Buy-Only Mode: Tailored for traders focusing exclusively on purchasing assets. In this mode, our backtester pinpoints the most advantageous sensitivity, speed reaction, and filter settings specifically for buying. Optimal settings in this mode may differ from those used in dual-direction trading, providing a customized approach to single-direction strategies.
Sell-Only Mode: Perfect for strategies primarily based on selling. This setting allows you to discover the ideal configurations for asset sales, which can be particularly useful if you are looking for optimal exit points in long-term transactions or under specific market conditions.
Here's an example of how profits can differ on the same asset when trading using two distinct strategies: exclusively buying or trading in both directions.
Above in the image, you can see how one-directional trading influences the results of backtests on historical data. While this does not guarantee future outcomes, it provides insight into how the strategy's performance can vary with different trading directions.
As you can also see from the image, one-directional trading has affected the optimal combination of settings for Sensitivity, Speed Reaction, and Filters.
Stop Loss and Take Profit
Our backtesting system, as you might have gathered, includes flexible settings for take profits and stop losses. Here are the main features:
Multiple Take Profits: Ability to set from 1 to 4 take profit levels.
Fixed Percentage: Option to assign a fixed percentage for each take profit.
Trade Proportion Fixation: Ability to set a fixed size from the trade for securing profits.
Stop Loss Installation: Option to establish a stop loss.
Break-Even Stop Loss: Ability to move the stop loss to a break-even point upon reaching a specified take profit level.
These settings offer extensive flexibility and can be customized according to your preferences and trading style. They are suitable for both novice and professional traders looking to test their trading strategies on historical data.
As illustrated in the image above, we have implemented money management by setting fixed take profits and stop losses. Utilizing money management has improved indicators such as profit, maximum drawdown, and profit factor, turning even historically unprofitable strategies into profitable ones. Although this does not guarantee future results, it serves as a valuable tool for understanding the effectiveness of money management.
Additionally, as you can see, the optimal settings for Signals Master have been adjusted, highlighting the best configurations for the most favorable outcomes.
Disclaimer:
Historical data is not indicative of future results. All indicators and strategies provided by RunRox are intended for integration with traders' strategies and should be used as tools for analysis rather than standalone solutions. Traders should use their own discretion and understand that all trading involves risk.
Supertrend TP SL (PRO)2. Main Components:
Supertrend Indicator:
Theoretical basis: The Supertrend indicator is based on two main concepts: Average True Range (ATR) and Factor. ATR measures the extent of price fluctuations in a given period of time, while Factor determines the sensitivity of the indicator to price changes.
Mechanism of operation: The indicator calculates two possible lines: one line representing the potential support level and another line representing the potential resistance level. The selection of the appropriate line depends on the current price direction. When the price is above the line, the indicator is considered to be in an uptrend, and vice versa.
Customizable inputs:
atrPeriod: Allows the trader to specify the time period for calculating the ATR. Shorter periods make the indicator more sensitive to price changes, while longer periods reduce its sensitivity.
factor: Allows the adjustment of the factor. Higher values make the indicator less likely to give false signals, but they may also delay entry signals.
Risk Management:
Take Profit and Stop Loss Orders:
TPPoints: Specifies the distance between the entry price and the take profit level. This distance is expressed in points, and is converted to an actual price value using syminfo.mintick (the smallest possible price movement of the traded asset).
SLPoints: Specifies the distance between the entry price and the stop loss level.
Importance: These orders allow the trader to specify the maximum loss he is willing to take and the profit target he is aiming to achieve, which helps in effective risk management.
Activate/Disable Trades:
isLongEnabled: Allows buy trades to be enabled or disabled, which allows the trader to trade in one direction only (for example, only trade in the uptrend during a bull market).
isShortEnabled: Allows sell trades to be enabled or disabled.
isTakeProfitEnabled: Allows take profit orders to be enabled or disabled. The trader may wish to disable them if he prefers to manage his trades manually.
isStopLossEnabled: Allows you to enable or disable stop loss orders. Although disabling them may seem tempting in some cases, it is a very risky move.
Visual Customization:
Line Style and Width:
lineStyle: Allows the trader to choose the style of lines used to draw TP and SL levels (Solid, Dashed, Dotted).
lineWidth: Sets the thickness of the lines.
Label Size:
labelSize: Allows you to set the size of the labels that display TP and SL levels (Small, Normal, Large).
Colors:
bullColor, bearColor, tpColor, slColor: Allows the trader to customize the colors of the different elements on the chart, making visual analysis easier.
3. Strategy Logic:
Determining Entry Signals: The strategy relies on the Supertrend indicator to determine entry signals. When the Supertrend trend changes from bearish to bullish, a buy trade is triggered (if isLongEnabled is enabled). When the trend changes from bullish to bearish, a sell trade is triggered (if isShortEnabled is enabled).
Order Execution: Once the entry signal is triggered, the strategy automatically places buy or sell orders.
Trade Management: After opening a trade, the strategy monitors the price and automatically triggers Take Profit and Stop Loss orders if the price reaches the specified levels.
Visualization: The strategy displays useful information on the chart, such as TP and SL lines, entry and exit signals, which helps the trader understand the strategy’s behavior and evaluate its performance.
4. Advanced Tips:
Optimizing Settings: The strategy’s performance can be improved by adjusting different input values. For example, the trader can experiment with different values for atrPeriod and factor to improve the accuracy of Supertrend signals.
Combining Indicators: This strategy can be combined with other indicators to improve the accuracy of entry signals. For example, the Relative Strength Index (RSI) can be used to confirm Supertrend signals.
Time Analysis: The strategy’s performance can be analyzed over different time periods to evaluate its effectiveness in various market conditions.
Strategy Testing: Before using the strategy in real trading, it should be tested on historical data (Backtesting) to evaluate its performance and determine the optimal settings.
5. Associated Risks:
False Signals: The Supertrend indicator may sometimes give false signals, especially in volatile markets.
Losses: Even with the use of stop loss orders, the trader may be exposed to significant losses.
Over-optimization: Over-optimization of settings on historical data may lead to misleading results. The trader should be careful about generalizing the results to future data.
Over-reliance on automation: The automated strategy should not be relied upon completely. The trader should monitor the trades and make appropriate decisions when necessary.
6. Disclaimer:
I am not a licensed financial advisor. This strategy is provided for educational and illustrative purposes only and should not be considered as investment advice. Trading in financial markets involves significant risks and you may lose your invested capital. Before making any investment decisions, consult a qualified financial advisor and conduct your own research. You alone are responsible for your trading decisions and their results. By using this strategy, you acknowledge and agree that I am not responsible for any losses or damages you may incur.
2. المكونات الرئيسية:
مؤشر Supertrend:
الأساس النظري: يعتمد مؤشر Supertrend على مفهومين رئيسيين هما: متوسط المدى الحقيقي (Average True Range - ATR) ومعامل الضرب (Factor). ATR يقيس مدى تقلبات الأسعار في فترة زمنية محددة، بينما Factor يحدد مدى حساسية المؤشر لتغيرات الأسعار.
آلية العمل: يقوم المؤشر بحساب خطين محتملين: خط يمثل مستوى الدعم المحتمل وخط آخر يمثل مستوى المقاومة المحتمل. يعتمد اختيار الخط المناسب على اتجاه السعر الحالي. عندما يكون السعر أعلى من الخط، يعتبر المؤشر في اتجاه صاعد، والعكس صحيح.
المدخلات القابلة للتخصيص:
atrPeriod: يتيح للمتداول تحديد الفترة الزمنية لحساب ATR. الفترات الأقصر تجعل المؤشر أكثر حساسية لتغيرات الأسعار، بينما الفترات الأطول تقلل من حساسيته.
factor: يسمح بتعديل معامل الضرب. القيم الأعلى تجعل المؤشر أقل عرضة لإعطاء إشارات خاطئة، ولكنها قد تؤخر أيضًا إشارات الدخول.
إدارة المخاطر:
أوامر جني الأرباح وإيقاف الخسارة:
TPPoints: يحدد المسافة بين سعر الدخول ومستوى جني الأرباح. يتم التعبير عن هذه المسافة بالنقاط (Points)، ويتم تحويلها إلى قيمة سعرية فعلية باستخدام syminfo.mintick (أصغر حركة سعرية ممكنة للأصل المتداول).
SLPoints: يحدد المسافة بين سعر الدخول ومستوى إيقاف الخسارة.
الأهمية: تتيح هذه الأوامر للمتداول تحديد الحد الأقصى للخسارة التي يرغب في تحملها والهدف الربحي الذي يسعى لتحقيقه، مما يساعد على إدارة المخاطر بشكل فعال.
تفعيل/تعطيل الصفقات:
isLongEnabled: يسمح بتفعيل أو تعطيل صفقات الشراء، مما يمكن المتداول من التداول في اتجاه واحد فقط (على سبيل المثال، التداول فقط في الاتجاه الصاعد خلال سوق صاعدة).
isShortEnabled: يسمح بتفعيل أو تعطيل صفقات البيع.
isTakeProfitEnabled: يسمح بتفعيل أو تعطيل أوامر جني الأرباح. قد يرغب المتداول في تعطيلها إذا كان يفضل إدارة صفقاته يدويًا.
isStopLossEnabled: يسمح بتفعيل أو تعطيل أوامر إيقاف الخسارة. على الرغم من أن تعطيلها قد يبدو مغريًا في بعض الحالات، إلا أنه يعتبر خطوة محفوفة بالمخاطر للغاية.
التخصيص المرئي:
نمط وعرض الخطوط:
lineStyle: يتيح للمتداول اختيار نمط الخطوط المستخدمة لرسم مستويات TP و SL (Solid, Dashed, Dotted).
lineWidth: يحدد سمك الخطوط.
حجم الملصقات:
labelSize: يسمح بتحديد حجم الملصقات التي تعرض مستويات TP و SL (Small, Normal, Large).
الألوان:
bullColor, bearColor, tpColor, slColor: تتيح للمتداول تخصيص ألوان العناصر المختلفة على الرسم البياني، مما يسهل عملية التحليل البصري.
3. منطق عمل الاستراتيجية:
تحديد إشارات الدخول: تعتمد الاستراتيجية على مؤشر Supertrend لتحديد إشارات الدخول. عندما يتغير اتجاه Supertrend من هابط إلى صاعد، يتم تفعيل صفقة شراء (إذا كانت isLongEnabled مفعلة). وعندما يتغير الاتجاه من صاعد إلى هابط، يتم تفعيل صفقة بيع (إذا كانت isShortEnabled مفعلة).
تنفيذ الأوامر: بمجرد تفعيل إشارة الدخول، تقوم الاستراتيجية بوضع أوامر الشراء أو البيع تلقائيًا.
إدارة الصفقات: بعد فتح الصفقة، تقوم الاستراتيجية بمراقبة السعر وتفعيل أوامر جني الأرباح وإيقاف الخسارة تلقائيًا في حالة وصول السعر إلى المستويات المحددة.
التمثيل المرئي: تعرض الاستراتيجية معلومات مفيدة على الرسم البياني، مثل خطوط TP و SL وإشارات الدخول والخروج، مما يساعد المتداول على فهم سلوك الاستراتيجية وتقييم أدائها.
4. نصائح متقدمة:
تحسين الإعدادات: يمكن تحسين أداء الاستراتيجية من خلال تعديل قيم المدخلات المختلفة. على سبيل المثال، يمكن للمتداول تجربة قيم مختلفة لـ atrPeriod و factor لتحسين دقة إشارات Supertrend.
الجمع بين المؤشرات: يمكن دمج هذه الاستراتيجية مع مؤشرات أخرى لتحسين دقة إشارات الدخول. على سبيل المثال، يمكن استخدام مؤشر القوة النسبية (RSI) لتأكيد إشارات Supertrend.
التحليل الزمني: يمكن تحليل أداء الاستراتيجية على مدى فترات زمنية مختلفة لتقييم مدى فعاليتها في ظروف السوق المتنوعة.
اختبار الاستراتيجية: قبل استخدام الاستراتيجية في التداول الحقيقي، يجب اختبارها على بيانات تاريخية (Backtesting) لتقييم أدائها وتحديد الإعدادات المثلى.
5. المخاطر المرتبطة:
الإشارات الخاطئة: قد يعطي مؤشر Supertrend إشارات خاطئة في بعض الأحيان، خاصة في الأسواق المتقلبة.
الخسائر: حتى مع استخدام أوامر إيقاف الخسارة، قد يتعرض المتداول لخسائر كبيرة.
التحسين المفرط: قد يؤدي التحسين المفرط للإعدادات على بيانات تاريخية إلى نتائج مضللة. يجب أن يكون المتداول حذرًا بشأن تعميم النتائج على البيانات المستقبلية.
الاعتماد الزائد على الأتمتة: يجب عدم الاعتماد بشكل كامل على الاستراتيجية الآلية. يجب على المتداول مراقبة الصفقات واتخاذ القرارات المناسبة عند الضرورة.
6. إخلاء المسؤولية:
أنا لست مستشارًا ماليًا مرخصًا. هذه الاستراتيجية مقدمة لأغراض تعليمية وتوضيحية فقط، ولا ينبغي اعتبارها نصيحة استثمارية. التداول في الأسواق المالية ينطوي على مخاطر كبيرة، وقد تخسر رأس المال المستثمر. قبل اتخاذ أي قرارات استثمارية، استشر مستشارًا ماليًا مؤهلاً وقم بإجراء بحثك الخاص. أنت وحدك المسؤول عن قراراتك التجارية ونتائجها. باستخدام هذه الاستراتيجية، فإنك تقر وتوافق على أنني لست مسؤولاً عن أي خسائر أو أضرار قد تتكبدها.
AlgoBuilder [Mean-Reversion] | FractalystWhat's the strategy's purpose and functionality?
This strategy is designed for both traders and investors looking to rely and trade based on historical and backtested data using automation.
The main goal is to build profitable mean-reversion strategies that outperform the underlying asset in terms of returns while minimizing drawdown.
For example, as for a benchmark, if the S&P 500 (SPX) has achieved an estimated 10% annual return with a maximum drawdown of -57% over the past 20 years, using this strategy with different entry and exit techniques, users can potentially seek ways to achieve a higher Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) while maintaining a lower maximum drawdown.
Although the strategy can be applied to all markets and timeframes, it is most effective on stocks, indices, future markets, cryptocurrencies, and commodities and JPY currency pairs given their trending behaviors.
In trending market conditions, the strategy employs a combination of moving averages and diverse entry models to identify and capitalize on upward market movements. It integrates market structure-based moving averages and bands mechanisms across different timeframes and provides exit techniques, including percentage-based and risk-reward (RR) based take profit levels.
Additionally, the strategy has also a feature that includes a built-in probability function for traders who want to implement probabilities right into their trading strategies.
Performance summary, weekly, and monthly tables enable quick visualization of performance metrics like net profit, maximum drawdown, profit factor, average trade, average risk-reward ratio (RR), and more.
This aids optimization to meet specific goals and risk tolerance levels effectively.
-----
How does the strategy perform for both investors and traders?
The strategy has two main modes, tailored for different market participants: Traders and Investors.
Trading:
1. Trading:
- Designed for traders looking to capitalize on bullish trending markets.
- Utilizes a percentage risk per trade to manage risk and optimize returns.
- Suitable for active trading with a focus on mean-reversion and risk per trade approach.
◓: Mode | %: Risk percentage per trade
3. Investing:
- Geared towards investors who aim to capitalize on bullish trending markets without using leverage while mitigating the asset's maximum drawdown.
- Utilizes pre-define percentage of the equity to buy, hold, and manage the asset.
- Focuses on long-term growth and capital appreciation by fully investing in the asset during bullish conditions.
- ◓: Mode | %: Risk not applied (In investing mode, the strategy uses 10% of equity to buy the asset)
-----
What's is FRMA? How does the triple bands work? What are the underlying calculations?
Middle Band (FRMA):
The middle band is the core of the FRMA system. It represents the Fractalyst Moving Average, calculated by identifying the most recent external swing highs and lows in the market structure.
By determining these external swing pivot points, which act as significant highs and lows within the market range, the FRMA provides a unique moving average that adapts to market structure changes.
Upper Band:
The upper band shows the average price of the most recent external swing highs.
External swing highs are identified as the highest points between pivot points in the market structure.
This band helps traders identify potential overbought conditions when prices approach or exceed this upper band.
Lower Band:
The lower band shows the average price of the most recent external swing lows.
External swing lows are identified as the lowest points between pivot points in the market structure.
The script utilizes this band to identify potential oversold conditions, triggering entry signals as prices approach or drop below the lower band.
Adjustments Based on User Inputs:
Users can adjust how the upper and lower bands are calculated based on their preferences:
Upper/Lower: This method calculates the average bands using the prices of external swing highs and lows identified in the market.
Percentage Deviation from FRMA: Alternatively, users can opt to calculate the bands based on a percentage deviation from the middle FRMA. This approach provides flexibility to adjust the width of the bands relative to market conditions and volatility.
-----
What's the purpose of using moving averages in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
Using moving averages is a widely-used technique to trade with the trend.
The main purpose of using moving averages in this strategy is to filter out bearish price action and to only take trades when the price is trading ABOVE specified moving averages.
The script uses different types of moving averages with user-adjustable timeframes and periods/lengths, allowing traders to try out different variations to maximize strategy performance and minimize drawdowns.
By applying these calculations, the strategy effectively identifies bullish trends and avoids market conditions that are not conducive to profitable trades.
The MA filter allows traders to choose whether they want a specific moving average above or below another one as their entry condition.
This comparison filter can be turned on (>) or off.
For example, you can set the filter so that MA#1 > MA#2, meaning the first moving average must be above the second one before the script looks for entry conditions. This adds an extra layer of trend confirmation, ensuring that trades are only taken in more favorable market conditions.
⍺: MA Period | Σ: MA Timeframe
-----
What entry modes are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
The strategy by default uses two different techniques for the entry criteria with user-adjustable left and right bars: Breakout and Fractal.
1. Breakout Entries :
- The strategy looks for pivot high points with a default period of 3.
- It stores the most recent high level in a variable.
- When the price crosses above this most recent level, the strategy checks if all conditions are met and the bar is closed before taking the buy entry.
◧: Pivot high left bars period | ◨: Pivot high right bars period
2. Fractal Entries :
- The strategy looks for pivot low points with a default period of 3.
- When a pivot low is detected, the strategy checks if all conditions are met and the bar is closed before taking the buy entry.
◧: Pivot low left bars period | ◨: Pivot low right bars period
2. Hunt Entries :
- The strategy identifies a candle that wicks through the lower FRMA band.
- It waits for the next candle to close above the low of the wick candle.
- When this condition is met and the bar is closed, the strategy takes the buy entry.
By utilizing these entry modes, the strategy aims to capitalize on bullish price movements while ensuring that the necessary conditions are met to validate the entry points.
-----
What type of stop-loss identification method are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
Initial Stop-Loss:
1. ATR Based:
The Average True Range (ATR) is a method used in technical analysis to measure volatility. It is not used to indicate the direction of price but to measure volatility, especially volatility caused by price gaps or limit moves.
Calculation:
- To calculate the ATR, the True Range (TR) first needs to be identified. The TR takes into account the most current period high/low range as well as the previous period close.
The True Range is the largest of the following:
- Current Period High minus Current Period Low
- Absolute Value of Current Period High minus Previous Period Close
- Absolute Value of Current Period Low minus Previous Period Close
- The ATR is then calculated as the moving average of the TR over a specified period. (The default period is 14).
Example - ATR (14) * 2
⍺: ATR period | Σ: ATR Multiplier
2. ADR Based:
The Average Day Range (ADR) is an indicator that measures the volatility of an asset by showing the average movement of the price between the high and the low over the last several days.
Calculation:
- To calculate the ADR for a particular day:
- Calculate the average of the high prices over a specified number of days.
- Calculate the average of the low prices over the same number of days.
- Find the difference between these average values.
- The default period for calculating the ADR is 14 days. A shorter period may introduce more noise, while a longer period may be slower to react to new market movements.
Example - ADR (20) * 2
⍺: ADR period | Σ: ADR Multiplier
3. PL Based:
This method places the stop-loss at the low of the previous candle.
If the current entry is based on the hunt entry strategy, the stop-loss will be placed at the low of the candle that wicks through the lower FRMA band.
Example:
If the previous candle's low is 100, then the stop-loss will be set at 100.
This method ensures the stop-loss is placed just below the most recent significant low, providing a logical and immediate level for risk management.
Application in Strategy (ATR/ADR):
- The strategy calculates the current bar's ADR/ATR with a user-defined period.
- It then multiplies the ADR/ATR by a user-defined multiplier to determine the initial stop-loss level.
By using these methods, the strategy dynamically adjusts the initial stop-loss based on market volatility, helping to protect against adverse price movements while allowing for enough room for trades to develop.
Each market behaves differently across various timeframes, and it is essential to test different parameters and optimizations to find out which trailing stop-loss method gives you the desired results and performance.
-----
What type of break-even and take profit identification methods are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
For Break-Even:
Percentage (%) Based:
Moves the initial stop-loss to the entry price when the price reaches a certain percentage above the entry.
Calculation:
Break-even level = Entry Price * (1 + Percentage / 100)
Example:
If the entry price is $100 and the break-even percentage is 5%, the break-even level is $100 * 1.05 = $105.
Risk-to-Reward (RR) Based:
Moves the initial stop-loss to the entry price when the price reaches a certain RR ratio.
Calculation:
Break-even level = Entry Price + (Initial Risk * RR Ratio)
Example:
If the entry price is $100, the initial risk is $10, and the RR ratio is 2, the break-even level is $100 + ($10 * 2) = $120.
FRMA Based:
Moves the stop-loss to break-even when the price hits the FRMA level at which the entry was taken.
Calculation:
Break-even level = FRMA level at the entry
Example:
If the FRMA level at entry is $102, the break-even level is set to $102 when the price reaches $102.
For TP1 (Take Profit 1):
- You can choose to set a take profit level at which your position gets fully closed or 50% if the TP2 boolean is enabled.
- Similar to break-even, you can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based take profit level, allowing you to set your TP1 level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
For TP2 (Take Profit 2):
- You can choose to set a take profit level at which your position gets fully closed.
- As with break-even and TP1, you can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based take profit level, allowing you to set your TP2 level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
When Both Percentage (%) Based and RR Based Take Profit Levels Are Off:
The script will adjust the take profit level to the higher FRMA band set within user inputs.
Calculation:
Take profit level = Higher FRMA band length/timeframe specified by the user.
This ensures that when neither percentage-based nor risk-to-reward-based take profit methods are enabled, the strategy defaults to using the higher FRMA band as the take profit level, providing a consistent and structured approach to profit-taking.
For TP1 and TP2, it's specifying the price levels at which the position is partially or fully closed based on the chosen method (percentage or RR) above the entry price.
These calculations are crucial for managing risk and optimizing profitability in the strategy.
⍺: BE/TP type (%/RR) | Σ: how many RR/% above the current price
-----
What's the ADR filter? What does it do? What are the underlying calculations?
The Average Day Range (ADR) measures the volatility of an asset by showing the average movement of the price between the high and the low over the last several days.
The period of the ADR filter used in this strategy is tied to the same period you've used for your initial stop-loss.
Users can define the minimum ADR they want to be met before the script looks for entry conditions.
ADR Bias Filter:
- Compares the current bar ADR with the ADR (Defined by user):
- If the current ADR is higher, it indicates that volatility has increased compared to ADR (DbU).(⬆)
- If the current ADR is lower, it indicates that volatility has decreased compared to ADR (DbU).(⬇)
Calculations:
1. Calculate ADR:
- Average the high prices over the specified period.
- Average the low prices over the same period.
- Find the difference between these average values in %.
2. Current ADR vs. ADR (DbU):
- Calculate the ADR for the current bar.
- Calculate the ADR (DbU).
- Compare the two values to determine if volatility has increased or decreased.
By using the ADR filter, the strategy ensures that trades are only taken in favorable market conditions where volatility meets the user's defined threshold, thus optimizing entry conditions and potentially improving the overall performance of the strategy.
>: Minimum required ADR for entry | %: Current ADR comparison to ADR of 14 days ago.
-----
What's the probability filter? What are the underlying calculations?
The probability filter is designed to enhance trade entries by using buyside liquidity and probability analysis to filter out unfavorable conditions.
This filter helps in identifying optimal entry points where the likelihood of a profitable trade is higher.
Calculations:
1. Understanding Swing highs and Swing Lows
Swing High: A Swing High is formed when there is a high with 2 lower highs to the left and right.
Swing Low: A Swing Low is formed when there is a low with 2 higher lows to the left and right.
2. Understanding the purpose and the underlying calculations behind Buyside, Sellside and Equilibrium levels.
3. Understanding probability calculations
1. Upon the formation of a new range, the script waits for the price to reach and tap into equilibrium or the 50% level. Status: "⏸" - Inactive
2. Once equilibrium is tapped into, the equilibrium status becomes activated and it waits for either liquidity side to be hit. Status: "▶" - Active
3. If the buyside liquidity is hit, the script adds to the count of successful buyside liquidity occurrences. Similarly, if the sellside is tapped, it records successful sellside liquidity occurrences.
5. Finally, the number of successful occurrences for each side is divided by the overall count individually to calculate the range probabilities.
Note: The calculations are performed independently for each directional range. A range is considered bearish if the previous breakout was through a sellside liquidity. Conversely, a range is considered bullish if the most recent breakout was through a buyside liquidity.
Example - BSL > 55%
-----
What's the range length Filter? What are the underlying calculations?
The range length filter identifies the price distance between buyside and sellside liquidity levels in percentage terms. When enabled, the script only looks for entries when the minimum range length is met. This helps ensure that trades are taken in markets with sufficient price movement.
Calculations:
Range Length (%) = ( ( Buyside Level − Sellside Level ) / Current Price ) ×100
Range Bias Identification:
Bullish Bias: The current range price has broken above the previous external swing high.
Bearish Bias: The current range price has broken below the previous external swing low.
Example - Range length filter is enabled | Range must be above 1%
>: Minimum required range length for entry | %: Current range length percentage in a (Bullish/Bearish) range
-----
What's the day filter Filter, what does it do?
The day filter allows users to customize the session time and choose the specific days they want to include in the strategy session. This helps traders tailor their strategies to particular trading sessions or days of the week when they believe the market conditions are more favorable for their trading style.
Customize Session Time:
Users can define the start and end times for the trading session.
This allows the strategy to only consider trades within the specified time window, focusing on periods of higher market activity or preferred trading hours.
Select Days:
Users can select which days of the week to include in the strategy.
This feature is useful for excluding days with historically lower volatility or unfavorable trading conditions (e.g., Mondays or Fridays).
Benefits:
Focus on Optimal Trading Periods:
By customizing session times and days, traders can focus on periods when the market is more likely to present profitable opportunities.
Avoid Unfavorable Conditions:
Excluding specific days or times can help avoid trading during periods of low liquidity or high unpredictability, such as major news events or holidays.
Increased Flexibility: The filter provides increased flexibility, allowing traders to adapt the strategy to their specific needs and preferences.
Example - Day filter | Session Filter
θ: Session time | Exchange time-zone
-----
What tables are available in this script?
Table Type:
- Summary: Provides a general overview, displaying key performance parameters such as Net Profit, Profit Factor, Max Drawdown, Average Trade, Closed Trades and more.
Avg Trade: The sum of money gained or lost by the average trade generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the Net Profit by the overall number of closed trades. An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.
MaxDD: Displays the largest drawdown of losses, i.e., the maximum possible loss that the strategy could have incurred among all of the trades it has made. This value is calculated separately for every bar that the strategy spends with an open position.
Profit Factor: The amount of money a trading strategy made for every unit of money it lost (in the selected currency). This value is calculated by dividing gross profits by gross losses.
Avg RR: This is calculated by dividing the average winning trade by the average losing trade. This field is not a very meaningful value by itself because it does not take into account the ratio of the number of winning vs losing trades, and strategies can have different approaches to profitability. A strategy may trade at every possibility in order to capture many small profits, yet have an average losing trade greater than the average winning trade. The higher this value is, the better, but it should be considered together with the percentage of winning trades and the net profit.
Winrate: The percentage of winning trades generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the number of winning trades by the total number of closed trades generated by a strategy. Percent profitable is not a very reliable measure by itself. A strategy could have many small winning trades, making the percent profitable high with a small average winning trade, or a few big winning trades accounting for a low percent profitable and a big average winning trade. Most mean-reversion successful strategies have a percent profitability of 40-80% but are profitable due to risk management control.
BE Trades: Number of break-even trades, excluding commission/slippage.
Losing Trades: The total number of losing trades generated by the strategy.
Winning Trades: The total number of winning trades generated by the strategy.
Total Trades: Total number of taken traders visible your charts.
Net Profit: The overall profit or loss (in the selected currency) achieved by the trading strategy in the test period. The value is the sum of all values from the Profit column (on the List of Trades tab), taking into account the sign.
- Monthly: Displays performance data on a month-by-month basis, allowing users to analyze performance trends over each month.
- Weekly: Displays performance data on a week-by-week basis, helping users to understand weekly performance variations.
- OFF: Hides the performance table.
Profit Color:
- Allows users to set the color for representing profit in the performance table, helping to quickly distinguish profitable periods.
Loss Color:
- Allows users to set the color for representing loss in the performance table, helping to quickly identify loss-making periods.
These customizable tables provide traders with flexible and detailed performance analysis, aiding in better strategy evaluation and optimization.
-----
User-input styles and customizations:
To facilitate studying historical data, all conditions and rules can be applied to your charts. By plotting background colors on your charts, you'll be able to identify what worked and what didn't in certain market conditions.
Please note that all background colors in the style are disabled by default to enhance visualization.
-----
How to Use This Algobuilder to Create a Profitable Edge and System:
Choose Your Strategy mode:
- Decide whether you are creating an investing strategy or a trading strategy.
Select a Market:
- Choose a one-sided market such as stocks, indices, or cryptocurrencies.
Historical Data:
- Ensure the historical data covers at least 10 years of price action for robust backtesting.
Timeframe Selection:
- Choose the timeframe you are comfortable trading with. It is strongly recommended to use a timeframe above 15 minutes to minimize the impact of commissions/slippage on your profits.
Set Commission and Slippage:
- Properly set the commission and slippage in the strategy properties according to your broker or prop firm specifications.
Parameter Optimization:
- Use trial and error to test different parameters until you find the performance results you are looking for in the summary table or, preferably, through deep backtesting using the strategy tester.
Trade Count:
- Ensure the number of trades is 100 or more; the higher, the better for statistical significance.
Positive Average Trade:
- Make sure the average trade value is above zero.
(An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.)
Performance Metrics:
- Look for a high profit factor, and net profit with minimum drawdown.
- Ideally, aim for a drawdown under 20-30%, depending on your risk tolerance.
Refinement and Optimization:
- Try out different markets and timeframes.
- Continue working on refining your edge using the available filters and components to further optimize your strategy.
Automation:
- Once you’re confident in your strategy, you can use the automation section to connect the algorithm to your broker or prop firm.
- Trade a fully automated and backtested trading strategy, allowing for hands-free execution and management.
-----
What makes this strategy original?
1. Incorporating direct integration of probabilities into the strategy.
2. Utilizing built-in market structure-based moving averages across various timeframes.
4. Offering both investing and trading strategies, facilitating optimization from different perspectives.
5. Automation for efficient execution.
6. Providing a summary table for instant access to key parameters of the strategy.
-----
How to use automation?
For Traders:
1. Ensure the strategy parameters are properly set based on your optimized parameters.
2. Enter your PineConnector License ID in the designated field.
3. Specify the desired risk level.
4. Provide the Metatrader symbol.
5. Check for chart updates to ensure the automation table appears on the top right corner, displaying your License ID, risk, and symbol.
6. Set up an alert with the strategy selected as Condition and the Message as {{strategy.order.alert_message}}.
7. Activate the Webhook URL in the Notifications section, setting it as the official PineConnector webhook address.
8. Double-check all settings on PineConnector to ensure the connection is successful.
9. Create the alert for entry/exit automation.
For Investors:
1. Ensure the strategy parameters are properly set based on your optimized parameters.
2. Choose "Investing" in the user-input settings.
3. Create an alert with a specified name.
4. Customize the notifications tab to receive alerts via email.
5. Buying/selling alerts will be triggered instantly upon entry or exit order execution.
-----
Terms and Conditions | Disclaimer
Our charting tools are provided for informational and educational purposes only and should not be construed as financial, investment, or trading advice. They are not intended to forecast market movements or offer specific recommendations. Users should understand that past performance does not guarantee future results and should not base financial decisions solely on historical data.
Built-in components, features, and functionalities of our charting tools are the intellectual property of @Fractalyst Unauthorized use, reproduction, or distribution of these proprietary elements is prohibited.
By continuing to use our charting tools, the user acknowledges and accepts the Terms and Conditions outlined in this legal disclaimer and agrees to respect our intellectual property rights and comply with all applicable laws and regulations.
Strategy - Plus / Connectable [Azullian]Discover the advanced capabilities of Strategy Plus, an essential component of the connectable indicator system designed for fast-paced strategy testing, visualization, and building within TradingView. This enhanced version of our foundational connectable strategy indicator seamlessly integrates with all connectable indicators . By utilizing the TradingView input source as a signal connector , it facilitates the linking of indicators to form a cohesive strategy. Each connectable indicator within the system sends signal weight to the next node, culminating in a comprehensive strategy that incorporates advanced customization options, sophisticated signal interpretation, and elaborate backtest labeling. Strategy Plus stands out by offering improved position management and extensive alert messaging capabilities, ensuring effective strategy refinement and backend integration.
█ DISTINCTIVE FEATURES
The Connectable Strategy Plus enhances risk mitigation within the connectable system through its advanced features and capabilities:
• Refined Signal Input Management: Tailor and precisely connect up to two signal filters with enhanced input flexibility, gain control, and strategic direction settings.
• Strategic Position Investment Control: Optimize positioning with versatile investment bases, custom investment percentages, and direction-specific investments for effective risk management.
• Advanced Exit Stop Loss Configuration: Implement custom stop loss tactics with diverse base modes and trailing options for tailored risk management.
• Strategic Exit Take Profit Settings: Apply precision-driven take profit strategies with various calculation modes and dynamic trailing functionality.
• Calibrated Entry Position Allocation: Optimize investment distribution for entry positions, including DCA and BRO trades, for strategic market response.
• Refined Order Setting Customization: Ensure exchange compliance with adjustable order settings, enhancing backtest accuracy and strategy reliability.
• Comprehensive Condition Settings: Define precise conditions for strategy execution, including date range filtering and order/loss limitations.
• Intuitive Visualization: Enhance strategy clarity with customizable visual elements and trade visualization features.
• Advanced Alert Configurations: Stay informed with comprehensive and customizable alerts for effective backend integration.
• Backend Integration With JSON Format: Leverage elaborate and structured data in JSON format for advanced analytics, enhancing decision-making and strategy optimization outside TradingView.
Let's review the separate parts of this indicator.
█ STRATEGY INPUTS
We've provided 2 inputs for connecting a signal filter or indicators or chains (1→, 2→) which are all set to 'Close' by default.
An input has several controls:
• Enable disable: Toggle the entire input on or off
• Input: Connect indicators or signal filter here, choose indicators with a compatible : Signal connector.
• G - Gain: Increase or reduce the strength of the incoming signal by a factor.
• SM - Signal Mode: Choose a trading direction compatible with the settings in your signal filter
• XM - Exit Mode: Determine when to allow to exit your open trade
○ Always: Doesn't take the restrictions into account, this ignores all the settings chosen in ML or MP
○ Restricted: Use both ML and MP conditions
○ Loss: Use the ML condition only, for example: Position will be exited and the exit signal will be allowed only when the loss exceeds the ML parameter
○ Profit: Use the MP condition only for example: Exits will only be allowed when the profit of the position exceeds the condition of the MP parameter
█ POSITION INVESTMENT
Determine the percentage of your trading budget you would like to use in each position based on the strategy's profit or loss.
• LINVB - Loss Investment Base: Choose which base to use to determine the investment percentage when the strategy is in a loss.
○ Equity: Use the equity as the base for percentage calculation.
○ Initial capital: Use the initial capital as the base for percentage calculation.
• LINV% - Loss Investment Percentage: Set a percentage of the chosen investment base as the investment for a new position.
○ For example, when 10% in loss, and a initial capital of $100, and the investment base is set to equity with a percentage of 50%, your investment will be 50% of $90, $45.
• PINVB - Profit Investment Base: Choose which base to use to determine the investment percentage when the strategy is in profit.
○ Equity: Use the equity as the base for percentage calculation.
○ Initial capital: Use the initial capital as the base for percentage calculation.
• PINV% - Profit Investment Percentage: Set a percentage of the chosen investment base as the investment for a new position.
○ For example, when 10% in profit, and an initial capital of $100, and the investment base is set to equity with a percentage of 100%, your investment will be 100% of $110, $110.
• XINVB - Custom Profit Investment Base: Choose which base to use to determine the investment percentage when the strategy is above a custom profit threshold (XT).
○ Equity: Use the equity as the base for percentage calculation.
○ Initial capital: Use the initial capital as the base for percentage calculation.
• XINV% - Custom Profit Investment Percentage: Set a percentage of the chosen investment base as the investment for a new position.
○ For example, when 100% in profit, exceeding the XT threshold of 50%, and an initial capital of $100, and the investment base is set to equity with a percentage of 50%, your investment will be 50% of $200, $100.
• XT% - Custom Profit Threshold: Determine how much profit triggers these custom profit investment settings.
• ELIB% - Entry Long Investment Base: Following previous settings, you can further restrict the investment according to the long trading direction.
○ For instance, if the previous calculation resulted in $45 to be used as an investment, and you've set the ELIB% to 50%, your long position will use 50% of $45, which is $22.5.
• ESIB% - Entry Short Investment Base: Following previous settings, you can further restrict the investment according to the short trading direction.
○ For example, if the previous calculation resulted in $45 to be used as an investment, and you've set the ESIB% to 50%, your short position will use 50% of $45, which is $22.5.
• RISK% - Risk Percentage:
○ Determine how much of the calculated position investment is at risk when the stop-loss is hit.
- For example, 1% of $45 represents a maximum loss of $0.45.
○ Risk percentage works together with the stop loss and the max leverage.
• MXLVG - Maximum Leverage:
○ Investigate the trading rules for your trading pair and use the maximum allowed amount of leverage.
○ To determine the number of contracts to be bought or sold, considering the stop loss and the specified risk percentage, the maximum leverage available will constrain the amount of leverage utilized to ensure that the maximum risk threshold is not exceeded. For instance, suppose the stop loss is set at 1%, and the risk percentage is defined as 10%. Initially, the calculated leverage to be used would be 10. However, if there is a maximum leverage cap set at 5, it would constrain the calculated leverage of 10 to adhere to the maximum limit of 5.
█ EXIT STOP LOSS
Determine the Stop Loss price based on your selected configuration.
As the stop loss is an integral part of the ordered contracts calculation used in conjunction with the Risk and Max leverage, you'll always need to provide a stop loss price.
• SLLB - Stop Loss Long Base: Choose a stop loss mode for calculating stop loss prices in long positions.
○ Risk: Determines the price using the Risk parameter (RISK%) and maximum leverage (MXLVG). In this case, SLLB% will not have any impact.
○ Price Entry + Offset: Calculates the stop loss price based on a offset percentage (SLLB%) from the entry price of the position.
○ Source: Computes the stop loss price based on an external indicator defined in SLLSRC.
- If this results in an invalid price, the calculation will revert to using the price entry + offset.
○ Source + Offset: Determines the stop loss price based on a positive or negative offset percentage (SLLB%) from an external indicator defined in SLLSRC.
- If this results in an invalid price, the calculation will fall back to using the price entry + offset.
• SLLB% - Stop Loss Long Base Percentage: Define an offset percentage that will be applied in the price entry + offset and source + offset stop loss modes.
• SLLSRC - Stop Loss Long Source: Connect an external indicator as the source for stop loss (only those providing price values eg: bollinger bands, moving averages...).
• SLLT - Stop Loss Long Trailing:
○ Fixed: The initial stop loss will be kept and no trailing stop loss will be applied.
○ Trail Stop: Takes into account all settings defined in SLLB and SLLB% and recalculates them with each candle.
- If a better stop loss is computed, it replaces the existing stop loss. In this mode SLLT% will be disregarded.
○ Trail Stop till BE: Similar to trailing stop mode, but it stops trailing when the stop loss reaches the break-even point.
○ Trail Stop from BE: Similar to trailing stop mode, but it starts trailing when the stop loss reaches the break-even point.
○ Trail Price: Computes the trailing stop loss price based on an offset percentage (SLLT%) from the closing price of the current candle.
- If a better stop loss price is calculated, it will be set as the new stop loss price.
○ Trail Price till BE: Similar to the Trail Price mode, but it stops trailing when the stop loss reaches the break-even point.
○ Trail Price from BE: Similar to Trail Price mode, but it starts trailing when the stop loss reaches the break-even point.
○ Trail Incr: Adapts the trailing stop loss price based on the offset percentage (SLLT%).
- Each price change in favor of your position will incrementally adapt the trailing stop loss with SLLT%.
○ Trail Incr till BE: Similar to the Trail Incr mode, but it stops trailing when the stop loss reaches the break-even point.
• SLLT% - Stop Loss Long Trailing Percentage: This percentage serves as an offset or increment depending on your chosen trailing mode.
• SLSB - Stop Loss Short Base: Functions similarly to SLLB but for short positions.
• SLSB% - Stop Loss Short Base Percentage: Functions similarly to SLLB% but for short positions.
• SLSSRC - Stop Loss Short Source: Functions similarly to SLLSRC but for short positions.
• SLST - Stop Loss Short Trailing: Functions similarly to SLLT but for short positions.
• SLST% - Stop Loss Short Trailing Percentage: Functions similarly to SLLT% but for short positions.
█ EXIT TAKE PROFIT
Determine the Take Profit price based on your selected configuration.
• TPLB - Take Profit Long Base: Choose a take profit mode for calculating take profit prices in long positions.
○ Reward: Determines the take profit price using the Risk parameter (RISK%) and the calculated Stop Loss price and the set reward percentage (TPLB%).
- For example: Risk 1%, Calculated Stop loss price: $90, Entry price: $100, Reward (TPLB%): 2%, will result in a take profit price on $120.
○ Price Entry + Offset: Calculates the take profit price based on a offset percentage (TPLB%) from the entry price of the position.
- For example: Entry price: $100, Offset (TPLB%): 2%, will result in a take profit price on $102.
○ Source: Computes the take profit price based on an external input from another indicator defined in TPLSRC.
- If this results in an invalid price, the calculation will revert to using the price entry + offset.
○ Source + Offset: Determines the take profit price based on a positive or negative offset percentage (TPLB%) from an external indicator inpuy defined in TPLSRC.
- If this results in an invalid price, the calculation will fall back to using the price entry + offset.
• TPLB% - Take Profit Long Base Percentage: Define an offset percentage that will be applied in the price entry + offset and source + offset take profit modes.
• TPLSRC - Take Profit Long Source: Choose to connect an external indicator as the source for take profit (of course only those which provide price values eg: bollinger bands, moving averages... but not oscillators).
• TPLT - Take Profit Long Trailing:
○ Fixed: The initial take profit will be kept and no trailing take profit will be applied.
○ Trail Profit: Takes into account all settings defined in TPLB and TPLB% and recalculates them with each candle.
- If an applicable take profit is computed, it replaces the existing take profit. In this mode TPLT% will be disregarded.
○ Trail Profit till BE: Similar to trailing profit mode, but it stops trailing when the take profit reaches the break-even point.
○ Trail Profit from BE: Similar to trailing profit mode, but it starts trailing when the take profit reaches the break-even point.
○ Trail Price: Computes the trailing take profit price based on an offset percentage (TPLT%) from the closing price of the current candle.
- If an applicable take profit price is calculated, it will be set as the new take profit price.
○ Trail Price till BE: Similar to the Trail Price mode, but it stops trailing when the take profit reaches the break-even point.
○ Trail Price from BE: Similar to Trail Price mode, but it starts trailing when the take profit reaches the break-even point.
○ Trail Incr: Adapts the trailing take profit price based on the offset percentage (TPLT%). Each price change against your position will incrementally adapt the trailing take profit with TPLT%.
○ Trail Incr till BE: Similar to the Trail Incr mode, but it stops trailing when the take profit reaches the break-even point.
• TPLT% - Take Profit Long Trailing Percentage: This percentage serves as an offset or increment depending on your chosen trailing mode.
• TPSB - Take Profit Short Base: Functions similarly to TPLB but for short positions.
• TPSB% - Take Profit Short Base Percentage: Functions similarly to TPLB% but for short positions.
• TPSSRC - Take Profit Short Source: Functions similarly to TPLSRC but for short positions.
• TPST - Take Profit Short Trailing: Functions similarly to TPLT but for short positions.
• TPST% - Take Profit Short Trailing Percentage: Functions similarly to TPLT% but for short positions.
█ ENTRY INVESTMENT DISTRIBUTION
Based on your position investment calculation you can distribute the position investment accross the initial opening trade of the position (SIG%) or the follow up Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA%) or Break Out (BRO%) trades.
For example: SIG%: 10%, DCA%: 45%, BRO%: 45% and the calculated Position Investment is $100, then the initial trade will receive $10, DCA will receive $45, and BRO will receive $45 to work with. Disable BRO and or DCA by setting them to 0%. Keep in mind that the sum of SIG, BRO and DCA may not exceed 100%.
• SIG% - Initial order investment percentage based on the signal: The percentage of the position investment distributed over normal trades.
• DCA% - Dollar Cost Averaging investment percentage: The percentage of the position investment distributed to DCA trades.
• BRO% - Break Out investment percentage: The percentage of the position investment distributed to BRO trades.
█ ENTRY DCA
DCA (Dollar-Cost Averaging) is a risk mitigation strategy where the allocated DCA% budget from the Entry Investment Distribution is distributed among x levels (DCA#) based on calculated prices (DPLM) and order sizes (DOSM), when prices move against your position.
• DCA# - Maximum DCA levels: Set the maximum number of DCA levels.
• DPLM - DCA Price Level Mode: Choose a price level mode that determines at which prices the additional purchases are distributed:
○ Linear: Entry prices are evenly spaced at regular intervals.
○ QuadIn: Entry prices are front-loaded, with more at the beginning and fewer later.
○ QuadOut: Entry prices are back-loaded, with fewer at the beginning and more later.
○ QuadInOut: Entry prices start front-loaded, then become back-loaded.
○ CubicIn: Similar to QuadIn but with a smoother front-loaded distribution.
○ CubicOut: Similar to QuadOut but with a smoother back-loaded distribution.
○ ExpoIn: Entry prices are exponentially increasing, starting small and growing.
○ ExpoOut: Entry prices are exponentially decreasing, starting large and reducing.
○ ExpoInOut: Entry prices start exponentially increasing, then decrease exponentially.
• DOSM - DCA Order Size Mode: Choose a DCA budget distribution mode for order sizes:
○ Linear: Order sizes are evenly spaced at regular intervals.
○ QuadIn: Order sizes are front-loaded, with larger orders at the beginning and smaller ones later.
○ QuadOut: Order sizes are back-loaded, with smaller orders at the beginning and larger ones later.
○ QuadInOut: Order sizes start front-loaded and transition to back-loaded.
○ CubicIn: Similar to QuadIn but with a smoother front-loaded distribution of order sizes.
○ CubicOut: Similar to QuadOut but with a smoother back-loaded distribution of order sizes.
○ ExpoIn: Order sizes exponentially increase, starting small and growing.
○ ExpoOut: Order sizes exponentially decrease, starting large and reducing.
○ ExpoInOut: Order sizes start exponentially increasing, then decrease exponentially.
For a visual representation of the price or order size distribution modes, refer to online easing curves.
█ ENTRY BRO
BRO (Break Out) is a risk mitigation strategy where the allocated BRO% budget from the Entry Investment Distribution is distributed among x levels (BRO#) based on calculated prices (BPLM) and order sizes (BOSM), when prices move in favor of your position.
• BRO# - Maximum BRO levels: Set the maximum number of BRO levels.
• BPLM - BRO Price Level Mode: Choose a price level mode that determines at which prices the additional purchases are distributed:
○ Distribution easing modes work similar as the DCA easing modes.
• BOSM - BRO Order Size Mode: Choose a BRO budget distribution mode for order sizes:
○ Distribution easing modes work similar as the DCA easing modes.
█ ORDER SETTINGS
Fine-tune accuracy to match your exchange's trading constraints, enhancing backtest precision with these settings, default settings are least restrictive for crypto trading pairs.
• MINP - Mininmum Position Notional Value: Exchange-defined minimum notional value for positions:
○ Calculated based on your exchange's rules and is the minimum total value your position must hold to meet their requirements It is calculated by multiplying Quantity with price and leverage.
○ It helps ensure your trades align with your exchange's standards.
• MAXP - Maximum Position Notional Value: Exchange-defined maximum notional value for positions:
○ Similar to MINP, this value is calculated based on your exchange's rules and represents the maximum total value allowed for your position.
• MINQ - Mininmum Order Quantity: Least permissible order quantity based on exchange rules:
○ This is the smallest quantity of an asset that your exchange allows you to trade in a single order.
• MAXQ - Maximum Order Quantity: Highest permissible order quantity according to exchange rules:
○ Opposite of MINQ, this is the largest quantity of an asset you can trade in a single order as defined by your exchange.
• DECP - Decimals in Order Price: Allowed decimal places in order prices as per exchange specifications:
○ This value specifies the number of decimal places you can use when specifying the price of an order.
• DECQ - Decimals in Order Quantity: Permitted decimal places in order quantities according to exchange specifications:
○ Similar to DECP, this value indicates the number of decimal places you can use when specifying the quantity of an asset in an order.
█ STRATEGY CONDITIONS
Specify when the strategy is permitted to execute trades.
• DATE: Enable the Date Range filter to restrict entries to a specific date range.
○ START: Set a start date and hour to commence trading.
○ END: Set an end date and hour to conclude trading within the defined range.
• IDO - Maximum Intraday Orders: Limit the number of orders the strategy can place within a single trading day. Upon reaching this limit, the strategy temporarily halts further entries for the day.
• DL% - Maximum Intraday Loss%: Set a threshold for the maximum allowable intraday loss as a percentage of equity. When exceeded, the strategy temporarily suspends trading for the day.
• CLD - Maximum Consecutive Loss Days: Define the maximum number of consecutive days the strategy can incur losses. Upon reaching this limit, the strategy halts trading and avoids new entries.
• DD% - Maximum Drawdown: Specify the maximum permissible drawdown as a percentage of equity. If this limit is met, the strategy halts trading and refrains from placing additional entries.
• TP% - Total Profit %: Establish a target for the total profit percentage the strategy aims to achieve. Once this target is attained, the strategy halts trading and refrains from initiating new entries.
• TL% - Total Loss %: Define a limit for the total loss percentage relative to the initial capital. If this limit is exceeded, the strategy discontinues trading and refrains from placing further entries.
■ VISUALS
• LINE: Activate a colored dashed diagonal line to visually connect the entry and exit points of positions.
• SLTP: Enable visualization of stop loss, take profit, and break-even levels.
• PNL: Enable Break-Even and Close Lines along with a colored area in between to visualize profit and loss.
• ☼: Brightness % : Adjust the opacity of the plotted trading visuals.
• P - Profit Color : Choose the color for profit-related elements.
• L - Loss Color: Choose the color for loss-related elements.
• B - Breakeven Color : Select the color for break-even points.
• EL - Long Color: Specify the color for long positions.
• ES - Short Color: Specify the color for short positions.
• TRADE LABELING: For better analysis we've labeled all entries and exits conform with the type of order your strategy has executed, some examples:
○ EL-SIG0-124: Enter Long - Signal 0 - Position 124
○ EL-BRO1-130: Enter Long - BRO1 - Position 130
○ EL-BRO2-130: Enter Long - BRO2 - Position 130
○ ES-DCA1-140: Enter Short - DCA1 - Position 140
○ XS-DCA2-140: Exit Short - DCA2 - Position 140
○ XL-TP-150: Exit Long - Take Profit - Position 150
○ XS-TP-154: Exit Short - Take Profit - Position 154
○ XL-SL-160: Exit Long - Stop Loss - Position 160
○ XS-SL-164: Exit Short - Stop Loss - Position 164
○ XS-CND-165: Exit Short - Strategy Condition - Max intraday loss - Position 165
■ ALERT SETTINGS
For developers and those who wish to integrate TradingView alerts into their backend systems, we offer comprehensive labeling options.
• ALID: A unique identifier you've assigned to your alert.
• NAME: A structured name you've given to this strategy.
• LAYOUT: The layout key of the strategy, allowing direct chart linking from your backend.
• SYMBOL: The symbol on which the strategy operates.
○ ONCE: You can choose to include this information only in the first message to reduce message size and repetition in follow-up messages. (max. 4096 characters)
• TICK: The ticker for the strategy.
• CHART: The chart parameter containing the timeframe.period and timeframe.multiplier.
○ ONCE: You can choose to include this information only in the first message to reduce message size and repetition in follow-up messages. (max. 4096 characters)
• BAR: Includes bar information in the alert message.
• STRATEGY: Adds strategy inputs to the alert message.
○ ONCE: You can choose to include this information only in the first message to reduce message size and repetition in follow-up messages. (max. 4096 characters)
• PERFORMANCE: Incorporates strategy performance data into the alert message.
• SIGNAL: Appends received signal weights (EL, XL, ES, XS) to the alert message.
• ORDERS: Includes order details in the alert message.
• TAGS: Adds up to 6 tags and their corresponding values to the alert message.
○ ONCE: You can choose to include this information only in the first message to reduce message size and repetition in follow-up messages. (max. 4096 characters)
Of course we can't neglect letting you in on how this juicy JSON would look (without the // comments):
{
"id": 20726, // Message Id
"t": "2023-11-01T10:35:00Z", // Message Time
"al": { // Alert
"id": "639bfa9a-5f01-4031-8880-7ec01e972055", // Alert Id
"n": "TEST04", // Name
"l": "ABC123" // Layout
},
"sym": { // Symbol
"typ": "crypto", // Type
"r": "DOGEUSD.PM", // Root
"pre": "KRAKEN", // Prefix
"tc": "DOGEUSD.PM", // Ticker
"bc": "DOGE", // BaseCurrency
"c": "USD", // Currency
"d": "DOGEUSD Multi Collateral Perpetual Futures Contract", // Description
"mtc": 0.000001, // MinTick
"pv": 1, // PointValue
"ct": "PF_DOGEUSD" // CustomTicker
},
"ch": { // Chart
"pd": "1", // Period
"mul": 1 // Multiplier
},
"bar": { // Bar
"id": 20725, // Index
"t": "2023-11-01T10:33:00Z", // Time
"o": 0.066799, // Open
"h": 0.066799, // High
"l": 0.066799, // Low
"c": 0.066799, // Close
"v": 2924 // Vol
},
"strat": { // Strategy
"n": "Strategy - Plus / Connectable ", // Name
"sig": { // Signal
"c1e": true, // Connector1Enabled
"c1s": 500500.500501, // Connector1Source
"c1g": 1, // Connector1Gain
"c2e": false, // Connector2Enabled
"c2s": 0.067043, // Connector2Source
"c2g": 1, // Connector2Gain
"sm": "Swing (EL, ES)", // SignalMode
"xm": "Always", // ExitMode
"mlp": 0.01, // ExitModeMinPercLoss
"mpp": 0.01 // ExitModeMinPercProfit
},
"inv": { // Investment
"lb": "Equity", // LossBase
"lp": 50, // LossPerc
"pb": "Equity", // ProfitBase
"pp": 100, // ProfitPerc
"pcb": "Equity", // ProfitCustomBase
"pcp": 100, // ProfitCustomPerc
"pct": 10000, // ProfitCustomThreshold
"elp": 100, // LongPerc
"esp": 100, // ShortPerc
"rsk": 1, // MaxRisk
"lvg": 10 // MaxLeverage
},
"sl": { // StopLoss
"lb": "Price Entry + Offset", // LongBase
"lp": 0.2, // LongPerc
"lsrc": 0.067043, // LongSource
"lt": "Trail Stop", // LongTrailMode
"ltp": 0.2, // LongTrailPerc
"sb": "Price Entry + Offset", // ShortBase
"sp": 0.2, // ShortPerc
"ssrc": 0.067043, // ShortSource
"st": "Trail Stop", // ShortTrailMode
"stp": 0.2 // ShortTrailPerc
},
"tp": { // TakeProfit
"lb": "Price Entry + Offset", // LongBase
"lp": 1, // LongPerc
"lsrc": 0.067043, // LongSource
"lt": "Fixed", // LongTrailMode
"ltp": 1, // LongTrailPerc
"sb": "Price Entry + Offset", // ShortBase
"sp": 1, // ShortPerc
"ssrc": 0.067043, // ShortSource
"st": "Fixed", // ShortTrailMode
"stp": 1 // ShortTrailPerc
},
"dis": { // Distribution
"sigp": 10, // SignalPerc
"dcap": 0, // DCAPerc
"brop": 90 // BROPerc
},
"dca": { // DCA
"lvl": 3, // Levels
"pl": "linear", // ModePriceLevel
"os": "linear" // ModeOrderSize
},
"bro": { // BRO
"lvl": 3, // Levels
"pl": "expoIn", // ModePriceLevel
"os": "cubicOut" // ModeOrderSize
},
"ord": { // OrderSettings
"pmin": 5, // PNVMin
"pmax": 30000000, // PNVMax
"qmin": 0, // QtyMin
"qmax": 1000000000, // QtyMax
"dp": 6, // DecPrice
"dq": 6 // DecQty
},
"cnd": { // Conditions
"de": true, // DateRangeEnabled
"start": "2023-11-01T10:30:00Z", // StartTime
"end": "2024-12-31T23:30:00Z", // EndTime
"idoe": false, // MaxIntradayOrdersEnabled
"ido": 100, // MaxIntradayOrders
"dle": false, // MaxIntradayLossEnabled
"dl": 10, // MaxIntradayLossPerc
"clde": false, // MaxConsLossDaysEnabled
"cld": false, // MaxConsLossDays
"dde": false, // MaxDrawdownEnabled
"dd": 100, // MaxDrawdownPerc
"mpe": false, // MaxProfitEnabled
"mp": 200, // MaxProfitPerc
"mle": false, // MaxLossEnabled
"ml": -50 // MaxLossPerc
}
},
"perf": { // Performance
"ic": 1000, // InitialCapital
"eq": 1000, // Equity
"np": 0, // NetProfit
"op": 0, // OpenProfit
"ct": 0, // ClosedTrades
"ot": 0, // OpenTrades
"p": "FLAT", // MarketPosition
"ps": 0, // MarketPositionSize
"pp": "FLAT", // PreviousMarketPosition
"pps": 0 // PreviousMarketPositionSize
},
"sig": { // Signal
"el": 0, // EL
"xl": 0, // XL
"es": 6, // ES
"xs": 0 // XS
},
"ord": ,
"tag":
}
█ USAGE OF CONNECTABLE INDICATORS
■ Connectable chaining mechanism
Connectable indicators can be connected directly to the signal monitor, signal filter or strategy , or they can be daisy chained to each other while the last indicator in the chain connects to the signal monitor, signal filter or strategy. When using a signal filter you can chain the filter to the strategy input to make your chain complete.
• Direct chaining: Connect an indicator directly to the signal monitor, signal filter or strategy through the provided inputs (→).
• Daisy chaining: Connect indicators using the indicator input (→). The first in a daisy chain should have a flow (⌥) set to 'Indicator only'. Subsequent indicators use 'Both' to pass the previous weight. The final indicator connects to the signal monitor, signal filter, or strategy.
■ Set up this indicator with signals and a signal filter
The indicator provides visual cues based on signal conditions. However, its weight system is best utilized when paired with a connectable signal filter, monitor, or strategy .
Let's connect the Strategy - Plus to a connectable signal filter and connectable indicators :
1. Load all relevant indicators
• Load MA - Plus / Connectable
• Load Signal filter - Plus / Connectable
• Load Strategy - Plus / Connectable
2. Signal Filter Plus: Connect the MA - Plus to the Signal Filter
• Open the signal filter settings
• Choose one of the five input dropdowns (1→, 2→, 3→, 4→, 5→) and choose : MA - Plus / Connectable: Signal Connector
• Toggle the enable box before the connected input to enable the incoming signal
3. Signal Filter: Update the filter settings if needed
• The default filter mode for the trading direction is SWING, and is compatible with the default settings in the strategy and indicators.
4. Signal Filter: Update the weight threshold settings if needed
• All connectable indicators load by default with a score of 6 for each direction (EL, XL, ES, XS)
• By default, weight threshold is 'ABOVE' Threshold 1 (TH1) and Threshold 2 (TH2), both set at 5. This allows each occurrence to score, as the default score is 1 point above the threshold.
5. Strategy Plus: Connect one of the strategy plus inputs to the signal filters signal connector in the strategy settings
• Select a strategy input → and select the Signal filter - Plus: Signal connector
6. Strateg Plus: Enable filter compatible directions
• As the default setting of the filter is SWING, we should also set the SM (Strategy mode) to SWING.
7. Strateg Plus: You're ready to start optimizing
• Dive into all parameters and start optimizing your backtesting results.
█ BENEFITS
• Adaptable Modular Design: Arrange indicators in diverse structures via direct or daisy chaining, allowing tailored configurations to align with your analysis approach.
• Streamlined Backtesting: Simplify the iterative process of testing and adjusting combinations, facilitating a smoother exploration of potential setups.
• Intuitive Interface: Navigate TradingView with added ease. Integrate desired indicators, adjust settings, and establish alerts without delving into complex code.
• Signal Weight Precision: Leverage granular weight allocation among signals, offering a deeper layer of customization in strategy formulation.
• Advanced Signal Filtering: Define entry and exit conditions with more clarity, granting an added layer of strategy precision.
• Clear Visual Feedback: Distinct visual signals and cues enhance the readability of charts, promoting informed decision-making.
• Standardized Defaults: Indicators are equipped with universally recognized preset settings, ensuring consistency in initial setups across different types like momentum or volatility.
• Reliability: Our indicators are meticulously developed to prevent repainting. We strictly adhere to TradingView's coding conventions, ensuring our code is both performant and clean.
█ COMPATIBLE INDICATORS
Each indicator that incorporates our open-source 'azLibConnector' library and adheres to our conventions can be effortlessly integrated and used as detailed above.
For clarity and recognition within the TradingView platform, we append the suffix ' / Connectable' to every compatible indicator.
█ COMMON MISTAKES, CLARIFICATIONS AND TIPS
• Removing an indicator from a chain: Deleting a linked indicator and confirming the "remove study tree" alert will also remove all underlying indicators in the object tree. Before removing one, disconnect the adjacent indicators and move it to the object stack's bottom.
• Point systems: The azLibConnector provides 500 points for each direction (EL: Enter long, XL: Exit long, ES: Enter short, XS: Exit short) Remember this cap when devising a point structure.
• Flow misconfiguration: In daisy chains the first indicator should always have a flow (⌥) setting of 'indicator only' while other indicator should have a flow (⌥) setting of 'both'.
• Hide attributes: As connectable indicators send through quite some information you'll notice all the arguments are taking up some screenwidth and cause some visual clutter. You can disable arguments in Chart Settings / Status line.
• Layout and abbreviations: To maintain a consistent structure, we use abbreviations for each input. While this may initially seem complex, you'll quickly become familiar with them. Each abbreviation is also explained in the inline tooltips.
• Inputs: Connecting a connectable indicator directly to the strategy delivers the raw signal without a weight threshold, meaning every signal will trigger a trade.
• Layout and Abbreviations: Abbreviations streamline structure and input identification. Although they may seem complex initially, inline tooltips provide explanations, facilitating quick acclimatization.
• Total Trade Limit Error & Date-Time Filter: For deep backtesting, be mindful of the total trade limit. Utilize the date-time filter to narrow the test scope and avoid TradingView order limits.
• Calculation Timeout: Encounter a timeout? Adjust any parameter slightly to restart the calculation process.
• Message Character Limit: To stay within message character limits, consider turning off certain features or setting some to 'once'.
• Direct Indicator-to-Strategy Connection: When connecting an indicator directly to a strategy without thresholds, the strategy will default to long if weights are equally assigned.
• Pyramid Enabling with DCA and BRO: Activate pyramid orders, enabling you to optimize your strategy during Dollar Cost Averaging and Break Out trades.
• Recalculate & Fill Orders Properties: Adjusting these default settings in strategy properties tab may lead to unexpected behavior when backtesting. Approach with caution.
• Optimized for Crypto: Our indicators have been optimized and tested primarily on cryptocurrency markets. Results in other markets may vary.
• Inline Tooltips Documentation: Detailed documentation and guidance are available via inline tooltips for immediate assistance.
• Strategy Settings Margin: Set margin to 1 to be able to apply leverage.
• Styling Panel: Explore the styling panel to disable labels or any other visual cues to reduce clutter on busy charts, enhancing visual clarity and personalization.
• Applying Leverage on Spot Markets: Ensure that maximum leverage on spot markets is configured to 1.
• Unrealistic Order Sizes: Verify that the order book can accommodate your backtested order sizes.
█ A NOTE OF GRATITUDE
Through years of exploring TradingView and Pine Script, we've drawn immense inspiration from the community's knowledge and innovation. Thank you for being a constant source of motivation and insight.
█ RISK DISCLAIMER
Azullian's content, tools, scripts, articles, and educational offerings are presented purely for educational and informational uses. Please be aware that past performance should not be considered a predictor of future results.
Long-Only Opening Range Breakout (ORB) with Pivot PointsIntraday Trading Strategy: Long-Only Opening Range Breakout (ORB) with Pivot Points
Background:
Opening Range Breakout (ORB) is a popular long-only trading strategy that capitalizes on the early morning volatility in financial markets. It's based on the idea that the initial price movements during the first few minutes or hours of the trading day can set the tone for the rest of the session. The strategy involves identifying a price range within which the asset trades during the opening period and then taking long positions when the price breaks out to the upside of this range.
Pivot Points are a widely used technical indicator in trading. They represent potential support and resistance levels based on the previous day's price action. Pivot points are calculated using the previous day's high, low, and close prices and can help traders identify key price levels for making trading decisions.
How to Use the Script:
Initialization: This script is written in Pine Script, a domain-specific language for trading strategies on the TradingView platform. To use this script, you need to have access to TradingView.
Apply the Script: You can do this by adding it to your favorites, then selecting the script in the indicators list under favorites or by searching for it by name under community scripts.
Customize Settings: The script allows you to customize various settings through the TradingView interface. These settings include:
Opening Session: You can set the time frame for the opening session.
Max Trades per Day: Specify the maximum number of long trades allowed per trading day.
Initial Stop Loss Type: Choose between using a percentage-based stop loss or the previous candles low for stop loss calculations.
Stop Loss Percentage: If you select the percentage-based stop loss, specify the percentage of the entry price for the stop loss.
Backtesting Start and End Time: Set the time frame for backtesting the strategy.
Strategy Signals:
The script will display pivot points in blue (R1, R2, R3, R4, R5) and half-pivot points in gray (R0.5, R1.5, R2.5, R3.5, R4.5) on your chart.
The green line represents the opening range.
The script generates long (buy) signals based on specific conditions:
---The open price is below the opening range high (h).
---The current high price is above the opening range high.
---Pivot point R1 is above the opening range high.
---It's a long-only strategy designed to capture upside breakouts.
---It also respects the maximum number of long trades per day.
The script manages long positions, calculates stop losses, and adjusts long positions according to the defined rules.
Trailing Stop Mechanism
The script incorporates a dynamic trailing stop mechanism designed to protect and maximize profits for long positions. Here's how it works:
1. Initialization:
The script allows you to choose between two types of initial stop loss:
---Percentage-based: This option sets the initial stop loss as a percentage of the entry price.
---Previous day's low: This option sets the initial stop loss at the previous day's low.
2. Setting the Initial Stop Loss (`sl_long0`):
The initial stop loss (`sl_long0`) is calculated based on the chosen method:
---If "Percentage" is selected, it calculates the stop loss as a percentage of the entry price.
---If "Previous Low" is selected, it sets the stop loss at the previous day's low.
3. Dynamic Trailing Stop (`trail_long`):
The script then monitors price movements and uses a dynamic trailing stop mechanism (`trail_long`) to adjust the stop loss level for long positions.
If the current high price rises above certain pivot point levels, the trailing stop is adjusted upwards to lock in profits.
The trailing stop levels are calculated based on pivot points (`r1`, `r2`, `r3`, etc.) and half-pivot points (`r0.5`, `r1.5`, `r2.5`, etc.).
The script checks if the high price surpasses these levels and, if so, updates the trailing stop accordingly.
This dynamic trailing stop allows traders to secure profits while giving the position room to potentially capture additional gains.
4. Final Stop Loss (`sl_long`):
The script calculates the final stop loss level (`sl_long`) based on the following logic:
---If no position is open (`pos == 0`), the stop loss is set to zero, indicating there is no active stop loss.
---If a position is open (`pos == 1`), the script calculates the maximum of the initial stop loss (`sl_long0`) and the dynamic trailing stop (`trail_long`).
---This ensures that the stop loss is always set to the more conservative of the two values to protect profits.
5. Plotting the Stop Loss:
The script plots the stop loss level on the chart using the `plot` function.
It will only display the stop loss level if there is an open position (`pos == 1`) and it's not a new trading day (`not newday`).
The stop loss level is shown in red on the chart.
By combining an initial stop loss with a dynamic trailing stop based on pivot points and half-pivot points, the script aims to provide a comprehensive risk management mechanism for long positions. This allows traders to lock in profits as the price moves in their favor while maintaining a safeguard against adverse price movements.
End of Day (EOD) Exit:
The script includes an "End of Day" (EOD) exit mechanism to automatically close any open positions at the end of the trading day. This feature is designed to manage and control positions when the trading day comes to a close. Here's how it works:
1. Initialization:
At the beginning of each trading day, the script identifies a new trading day using the `is_newbar('D')` condition.
When a new trading day begins, the `newday` variable becomes `true`, indicating the start of a new trading session.
2. Plotting the "End of Day" Signal:
The script includes a plot on the chart to visually represent the "End of Day" signal. This is done using the `plot` function.
The plot is labeled "DayEnd" and is displayed as a comment on the chart. It signifies the EOD point.
3. EOD Exit Condition:
When the script detects that a new trading day has started (`newday == true`), it triggers the EOD exit condition.
At this point, the script proceeds to close all open positions that may have been active during the trading day.
4. Closing Open Positions:
The `strategy.close_all` function is used to close all open positions when the EOD exit condition is met.
This function ensures that any remaining long positions are exited, regardless of their current profit or loss.
The function also includes an `alert_message`, which can be customized to send an alert or notification when positions are closed at EOD.
Purpose of EOD Exit
The "End of Day" exit mechanism serves several essential purposes in the trading strategy:
Risk Management: It helps manage risk by ensuring that positions are not left open overnight when markets can experience increased volatility.
Capital Preservation: Closing positions at EOD can help preserve trading capital by avoiding potential adverse overnight price movements.
Rule-Based Exit: The EOD exit is rule-based and automatic, ensuring that it is consistently applied without emotions or manual intervention.
Scalability: It allows the strategy to be applied to various markets and timeframes where EOD exits may be appropriate.
By incorporating an EOD exit mechanism, the script provides a comprehensive approach to managing positions, taking profits, and minimizing risk as each trading day concludes. This can be especially important in volatile markets like cryptocurrencies, where overnight price swings can be significant.
Backtesting: The script includes a backtesting feature that allows you to test the strategy's performance over historical data. Set the start and end times for backtesting to see how the long-only strategy would have performed in the past.
Trade Execution: If you choose to use this script for live trading, make sure you understand the risks involved. It's essential to set up proper risk management, including position sizing and stop loss orders.
Monitoring: Monitor the long-only strategy's performance over time and be prepared to make adjustments as market conditions change.
Disclaimer: Trading carries a risk of capital loss. This script is provided for educational purposes and as a starting point for your own long-only strategy development. Always do your own research and consider seeking advice from a qualified financial professional before making trading decisions.
Machine Learning: SuperTrend Strategy TP/SL [YinYangAlgorithms]The SuperTrend is a very useful Indicator to display when trends have shifted based on the Average True Range (ATR). Its underlying ideology is to calculate the ATR using a fixed length and then multiply it by a factor to calculate the SuperTrend +/-. When the close crosses the SuperTrend it changes direction.
This Strategy features the Traditional SuperTrend Calculations with Machine Learning (ML) and Take Profit / Stop Loss applied to it. Using ML on the SuperTrend allows for the ability to sort data from previous SuperTrend calculations. We can filter the data so only previous SuperTrends that follow the same direction and are within the distance bounds of our k-Nearest Neighbour (KNN) will be added and then averaged. This average can either be achieved using a Mean or with an Exponential calculation which puts added weight on the initial source. Take Profits and Stop Losses are then added to the ML SuperTrend so it may capitalize on Momentum changes meanwhile remaining in the Trend during consolidation.
By applying Machine Learning logic and adding a Take Profit and Stop Loss to the Traditional SuperTrend, we may enhance its underlying calculations with potential to withhold the trend better. The main purpose of this Strategy is to minimize losses and false trend changes while maximizing gains. This may be achieved by quick reversals of trends where strategic small losses are taken before a large trend occurs with hopes of potentially occurring large gain. Due to this logic, the Win/Loss ratio of this Strategy may be quite poor as it may take many small marginal losses where there is consolidation. However, it may also take large gains and capitalize on strong momentum movements.
Tutorial:
In this example above, we can get an idea of what the default settings may achieve when there is momentum. It focuses on attempting to hit the Trailing Take Profit which moves in accord with the SuperTrend just with a multiplier added. When momentum occurs it helps push the SuperTrend within it, which on its own may act as a smaller Trailing Take Profit of its own accord.
We’ve highlighted some key points from the last example to better emphasize how it works. As you can see, the White Circle is where profit was taken from the ML SuperTrend simply from it attempting to switch to a Bullish (Buy) Trend. However, that was rejected almost immediately and we went back to our Bearish (Sell) Trend that ended up resulting in our Take Profit being hit (Yellow Circle). This Strategy aims to not only capitalize on the small profits from SuperTrend to SuperTrend but to also capitalize when the Momentum is so strong that the price moves X% away from the SuperTrend and is able to hit the Take Profit location. This Take Profit addition to this Strategy is crucial as momentum may change state shortly after such drastic price movements; and if we were to simply wait for it to come back to the SuperTrend, we may lose out on lots of potential profit.
If you refer to the Yellow Circle in this example, you’ll notice what was talked about in the Summary/Overview above. During periods of consolidation when there is little momentum and price movement and we don’t have any Stop Loss activated, you may see ‘Signal Flashing’. Signal Flashing is when there are Buy and Sell signals that keep switching back and forth. During this time you may be taking small losses. This is a normal part of this Strategy. When a signal has finally been confirmed by Momentum, is when this Strategy shines and may produce the profit you desire.
You may be wondering, what causes these jagged like patterns in the SuperTrend? It's due to the ML logic, and it may be a little confusing, but essentially what is happening is the Fast Moving SuperTrend and the Slow Moving SuperTrend are creating KNN Min and Max distances that are extreme due to (usually) parabolic movement. This causes fewer values to be added to and averaged within the ML and causes less smooth and more exponential drastic movements. This is completely normal, and one of the perks of using k-Nearest Neighbor for ML calculations. If you don’t know, the Min and Max Distance allowed is derived from the most recent(0 index of data array) to KNN Length. So only SuperTrend values that exhibit distances within these Min/Max will be allowed into the average.
Since the KNN ML logic can cause these exponential movements in the SuperTrend, they likewise affect its Take Profit. The Take Profit may benefit from this movement like displayed in the example above which helped it claim profit before then exhibiting upwards movement.
By default our Stop Loss Multiplier is kept quite low at 0.0000025. Keeping it low may help to reduce some Signal Flashing while not taking extra losses more so than not using it at all. However, if we increase it even more to say 0.005 like is shown in the example above. It can really help the trend keep momentum. Please note, although previous results don’t imply future results, at 0.0000025 Stop Loss we are currently exhibiting 69.27% profit while at 0.005 Stop Loss we are exhibiting 33.54% profit. This just goes to show that although there may be less Signal Flashing, it may not result in more profit.
We will conclude our Tutorial here. Hopefully this has given you some insight as to how Machine Learning, combined with Trailing Take Profit and Stop Loss may have positive effects on the SuperTrend when turned into a Strategy.
Settings:
SuperTrend:
ATR Length: ATR Length used to create the Original Supertrend.
Factor: Multiplier used to create the Original Supertrend.
Stop Loss Multiplier: 0 = Don't use Stop Loss. Stop loss can be useful for helping to prevent false signals but also may result in more loss when hit and less profit when switching trends.
Take Profit Multiplier: Take Profits can be useful within the Supertrend Strategy to stop the price reverting all the way to the Stop Loss once it's been profitable.
Machine Learning:
Only Factor Same Trend Direction: Very useful for ensuring that data used in KNN is not manipulated by different SuperTrend Directional data. Please note, it doesn't affect KNN Exponential.
Rationalized Source Type: Should we Rationalize only a specific source, All or None?
Machine Learning Type: Are we using a Simple ML Average, KNN Mean Average, KNN Exponential Average or None?
Machine Learning Smoothing Type: How should we smooth our Fast and Slow ML Datas to be used in our KNN Distance calculation? SMA, EMA or VWMA?
KNN Distance Type: We need to check if distance is within the KNN Min/Max distance, which distance checks are we using.
Machine Learning Length: How far back is our Machine Learning going to keep data for.
k-Nearest Neighbour (KNN) Length: How many k-Nearest Neighbours will we account for?
Fast ML Data Length: What is our Fast ML Length?? This is used with our Slow Length to create our KNN Distance.
Slow ML Data Length: What is our Slow ML Length?? This is used with our Fast Length to create our KNN Distance.
If you have any questions, comments, ideas or concerns please don't hesitate to contact us.
HAPPY TRADING!
GKD-BT Baseline Backtest [Loxx]The Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-BT Baseline Backtest is a backtesting module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System."
█ GKD-BT Baseline Backtest
The GKD-BT Baseline Backtest allows traders to backtest the Regular and Stepped baselines used in the GKD trading system. This module includes 65+ moving averages and 15+ types of volatility to choose from.
Additionally, this backtest module provides the option to test the GKD-B indicator with 1 to 3 take profits and 1 stop loss. The Trading backtest allows for the use of 1 to 3 take profits, while the Full backtest is limited to 1 take profit. The Trading backtest also offers the capability to apply a trailing take profit.
In terms of the percentage of trade removed at each take profit, this backtest module has the following hardcoded values:
Take profit 1: 50% of the trade is removed
Take profit 2: 25% of the trade is removed
Take profit 3: 25% of the trade is removed
Stop loss: 100% of the trade is removed
After each take profit is achieved, the stop loss level is adjusted. When take profit 1 is reached, the stop loss is moved to the entry point. Similarly, when take profit 2 is reached, the stop loss is shifted to take profit 1. The trailing take profit feature comes into play after take profit 2 or take profit 3, depending on the number of take profits selected in the settings. The trailing take profit is always activated on the final take profit when 2 or more take profits are chosen.
The backtest also offers the capability to restrict by a specific date range, allowing for simulated forward testing based on past data. Additionally, users have the option to display or hide a trading panel that provides relevant information about the backtest, statistics, and the current trade. It is also possible to activate alerts and toggle sections of the trading panel on or off. On the chart, historical take profit and stop loss levels are represented by horizontal lines overlaid for reference.
This backtest also includes an optional GKD-E Exit indicator that can be used to test early exits.
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses. Each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. You can change the values of the multipliers in the settings as well.
To utilize this strategy, follow these steps:
1. (Required) Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-B Baseline indicator into the GKD-BT Baseline Backtest field "Import GKD-B Baseline"
2. (Optional) Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-E Exit indicator into the GKD-BT Baseline Backtest field "Import GKD-E Exit". You can toggle the Exit on or off using the "Activate GKD-E Exit" option.
Baselines that are compatible with this backtest module:
GKD-B Baseline
GKD-B Stepped Baseline
Volatility Types Included
17 types of volatility are included in this indicator
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
8. Metamorphosis - a technical indicator that produces a compound signal from the combination of other GKD indicators*
*(not part of the NNFX algorithm)
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
What is an Metamorphosis indicator?
The concept of a metamorphosis indicator involves the integration of two or more GKD indicators to generate a compound signal. This is achieved by evaluating the accuracy of each indicator and selecting the signal from the indicator with the highest accuracy. As an illustration, let's consider a scenario where we calculate the accuracy of 10 indicators and choose the signal from the indicator that demonstrates the highest accuracy.
The resulting output from the metamorphosis indicator can then be utilized in a GKD-BT backtest by occupying a slot that aligns with the purpose of the metamorphosis indicator. The slot can be a GKD-B, GKD-C, or GKD-E slot, depending on the specific requirements and objectives of the indicator. This allows for seamless integration and utilization of the compound signal within the GKD-BT framework.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
6. GKD-M - Metamorphosis module (Metamorphosis, Number 8 in the NNFX algorithm, but not part of the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: GKD-BT Baseline Backtest as shown on the chart above
Baseline: Hull Moving Average as shown on the chart above
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Sherif's HiLo
Confirmation 2: uf2018
Continuation: Coppock Curve
Exit: Fisher Transform as shown on the chart above
Metamorphosis: Baseline Optimizer
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, GKD-M, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2. Baseline agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Standard Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2a. Baseline agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
1-Candle Baseline Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry
1a. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSVVC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Volatility/Volume agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
Confirmation 2 Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Volatility/Volume agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSC2C Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Confirmation 2 agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Volatility/Volume agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle
1b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
2b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, 1-Candle Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, 1-Candle Baseline Entry, Volatility/Volume Entry, 1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry, Confirmation 2 Entry, 1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry, or Pullback entry triggered previously
2. Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
4. Confirmation 1 agrees
5. Baseline agrees
6. Confirmation 2 agrees
GKD-BT Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-BT Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest is a Backtesting module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-BT Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest
The Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest module allows users to perform backtesting on Long and Short signals from the confluence between GKD-C Confirmation 1 and GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicators. This module encompasses two types of backtests: Trading and Full. The Trading backtest permits users to evaluate individual trades, whether Long or Short, one at a time. Conversely, the Full backtest allows users to analyze either Longs or Shorts separately by toggling between them in the settings, enabling the examination of results for each signal type. The Trading backtest emulates actual trading conditions, while the Full backtest assesses all signals, regardless of being Long or Short.
Additionally, this backtest module provides the option to test using indicators with 1 to 3 take profits and 1 stop loss. The Trading backtest allows for the use of 1 to 3 take profits, while the Full backtest is limited to 1 take profit. The Trading backtest also offers the capability to apply a trailing take profit.
In terms of the percentage of trade removed at each take profit, this backtest module has the following hardcoded values:
Take profit 1: 50% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 2: 25% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 3: 25% of the trade is removed.
Stop loss: 100% of the trade is removed.
After each take profit is achieved, the stop loss level is adjusted. When take profit 1 is reached, the stop loss is moved to the entry point. Similarly, when take profit 2 is reached, the stop loss is shifted to take profit 1. The trailing take profit feature comes into play after take profit 2 or take profit 3, depending on the number of take profits selected in the settings. The trailing take profit is always activated on the final take profit when 2 or more take profits are chosen.
The backtest module also offers the capability to restrict by a specific date range, allowing for simulated forward testing based on past data. Additionally, users have the option to display or hide a trading panel that provides relevant information about the backtest, statistics, and the current trade. It is also possible to activate alerts and toggle sections of the trading panel on or off. On the chart, historical take profit and stop loss levels are represented by horizontal lines overlaid for reference.
To utilize this strategy, follow these steps:
1. Adjust the "Confirmation Type" in the GKD-C Confirmation 1 Indicator to "GKD New."
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-C Confirmation 1 module into the GKD-BT Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-C Confirmation 1."
3. Adjust the "Confirmation Type" in the GKD-C Confirmation 2 Indicator to "GKD New."
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-C Confirmation 2 module into the GKD-BT Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-C Confirmation 2."
█ Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest Entries
Entries are generated from the confluence of a GKD-C Confirmation 1 and GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicators. The Confirmation 1 gives the signal and the Confirmation 2 indicator filters or "approves" the the Confirmation 1 signal. If Confirmation 1 gives a long signal and Confirmation 2 shows a downtrend, then the long signal is rejected. If Confirmation 1 gives a long signal and Confirmation 2 shows an uptrend, then the long signal is approved and sent to the backtest execution engine.
█ Volatility Types Included
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses. Each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. Users can also adjust the multiplier values in the settings.
This module includes 17 types of volatility:
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
Close-to-Close
Close-to-Close volatility is a classic and widely used volatility measure, sometimes referred to as historical volatility.
Volatility is an indicator of the speed of a stock price change. A stock with high volatility is one where the price changes rapidly and with a larger amplitude. The more volatile a stock is, the riskier it is.
Close-to-close historical volatility is calculated using only a stock's closing prices. It is the simplest volatility estimator. However, in many cases, it is not precise enough. Stock prices could jump significantly during a trading session and return to the opening value at the end. That means that a considerable amount of price information is not taken into account by close-to-close volatility.
Despite its drawbacks, Close-to-Close volatility is still useful in cases where the instrument doesn't have intraday prices. For example, mutual funds calculate their net asset values daily or weekly, and thus their prices are not suitable for more sophisticated volatility estimators.
Parkinson
Parkinson volatility is a volatility measure that uses the stock’s high and low price of the day.
The main difference between regular volatility and Parkinson volatility is that the latter uses high and low prices for a day, rather than only the closing price. This is useful as close-to-close prices could show little difference while large price movements could have occurred during the day. Thus, Parkinson's volatility is considered more precise and requires less data for calculation than close-to-close volatility.
One drawback of this estimator is that it doesn't take into account price movements after the market closes. Hence, it systematically undervalues volatility. This drawback is addressed in the Garman-Klass volatility estimator.
Garman-Klass
Garman-Klass is a volatility estimator that incorporates open, low, high, and close prices of a security.
Garman-Klass volatility extends Parkinson's volatility by taking into account the opening and closing prices. As markets are most active during the opening and closing of a trading session, it makes volatility estimation more accurate.
Garman and Klass also assumed that the process of price change follows a continuous diffusion process (Geometric Brownian motion). However, this assumption has several drawbacks. The method is not robust for opening jumps in price and trend movements.
Despite its drawbacks, the Garman-Klass estimator is still more effective than the basic formula since it takes into account not only the price at the beginning and end of the time interval but also intraday price extremes.
Researchers Rogers and Satchell have proposed a more efficient method for assessing historical volatility that takes into account price trends. See Rogers-Satchell Volatility for more detail.
Rogers-Satchell
Rogers-Satchell is an estimator for measuring the volatility of securities with an average return not equal to zero.
Unlike Parkinson and Garman-Klass estimators, Rogers-Satchell incorporates a drift term (mean return not equal to zero). As a result, it provides better volatility estimation when the underlying is trending.
The main disadvantage of this method is that it does not take into account price movements between trading sessions. This leads to an underestimation of volatility since price jumps periodically occur in the market precisely at the moments between sessions.
A more comprehensive estimator that also considers the gaps between sessions was developed based on the Rogers-Satchel formula in the 2000s by Yang-Zhang. See Yang Zhang Volatility for more detail.
Yang-Zhang
Yang Zhang is a historical volatility estimator that handles both opening jumps and the drift and has a minimum estimation error.
Yang-Zhang volatility can be thought of as a combination of the overnight (close-to-open volatility) and a weighted average of the Rogers-Satchell volatility and the day’s open-to-close volatility. It is considered to be 14 times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator.
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang (GKYZ) volatility estimator incorporates the returns of open, high, low, and closing prices in its calculation.
GKYZ volatility estimator takes into account overnight jumps but not the trend, i.e., it assumes that the underlying asset follows a Geometric Brownian Motion (GBM) process with zero drift. Therefore, the GKYZ volatility estimator tends to overestimate the volatility when the drift is different from zero. However, for a GBM process, this estimator is eight times more efficient than the close-to-close volatility estimator.
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
The Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) is a quantitative or statistical measure used to model or describe a time series. The EWMA is widely used in finance, with the main applications being technical analysis and volatility modeling.
The moving average is designed such that older observations are given lower weights. The weights decrease exponentially as the data point gets older – hence the name exponentially weighted.
The only decision a user of the EWMA must make is the parameter lambda. The parameter decides how important the current observation is in the calculation of the EWMA. The higher the value of lambda, the more closely the EWMA tracks the original time series.
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
This is the simplest calculation of volatility. It's the standard deviation of ln(close/close(1)).
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
This is calculated using a short- and long-run mean of variance multiplied by ?.
?avg(var;M) + (1 ? ?) avg(var;N) = 2?var/(M+1-(M-1)L) + 2(1-?)var/(M+1-(M-1)L)
Solving for ? can be done by minimizing the mean squared error of estimation; that is, regressing L^-1var - avg(var; N) against avg(var; M) - avg(var; N) and using the resulting beta estimate as ?.
Average True Range
The average true range (ATR) is a technical analysis indicator, introduced by market technician J. Welles Wilder Jr. in his book New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems, that measures market volatility by decomposing the entire range of an asset price for that period.
The true range indicator is taken as the greatest of the following: current high less the current low; the absolute value of the current high less the previous close; and the absolute value of the current low less the previous close. The ATR is then a moving average, generally using 14 days, of the true ranges.
True Range Double
A special case of ATR that attempts to correct for volatility skew.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation is a statistic that measures the dispersion of a dataset relative to its mean and is calculated as the square root of the variance. The standard deviation is calculated as the square root of variance by determining each data point's deviation relative to the mean. If the data points are further from the mean, there is a higher deviation within the data set; thus, the more spread out the data, the higher the standard deviation.
Adaptive Deviation
By definition, the Standard Deviation (STD, also represented by the Greek letter sigma ? or the Latin letter s) is a measure that is used to quantify the amount of variation or dispersion of a set of data values. In technical analysis, we usually use it to measure the level of current volatility.
Standard Deviation is based on Simple Moving Average calculation for mean value. This version of standard deviation uses the properties of EMA to calculate what can be called a new type of deviation, and since it is based on EMA, we can call it EMA deviation. Additionally, Perry Kaufman's efficiency ratio is used to make it adaptive (since all EMA type calculations are nearly perfect for adapting).
The difference when compared to the standard is significant--not just because of EMA usage, but the efficiency ratio makes it a "bit more logical" in very volatile market conditions.
Median Absolute Deviation
The median absolute deviation is a measure of statistical dispersion. Moreover, the MAD is a robust statistic, being more resilient to outliers in a data set than the standard deviation. In the standard deviation, the distances from the mean are squared, so large deviations are weighted more heavily, and thus outliers can heavily influence it. In the MAD, the deviations of a small number of outliers are irrelevant.
Because the MAD is a more robust estimator of scale than the sample variance or standard deviation, it works better with distributions without a mean or variance, such as the Cauchy distribution.
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Average True Range (ATR) is a widely used indicator for many occasions in technical analysis. It is calculated as the RMA of the true range. This version adds a "twist": it uses Perry Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio to calculate adaptive true range.
Mean Absolute Deviation
The mean absolute deviation (MAD) is a measure of variability that indicates the average distance between observations and their mean. MAD uses the original units of the data, which simplifies interpretation. Larger values signify that the data points spread out further from the average. Conversely, lower values correspond to data points bunching closer to it. The mean absolute deviation is also known as the mean deviation and average absolute deviation.
This definition of the mean absolute deviation sounds similar to the standard deviation (SD). While both measure variability, they have different calculations. In recent years, some proponents of MAD have suggested that it replace the SD as the primary measure because it is a simpler concept that better fits real life.
Static Percent
Static Percent allows the user to insert their own constant percent that will then be used to create take profits and stoploss
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Confiramtion Stack Backtest
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Fisher Transform as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: uf2018 as shown on the chart above
Continuation: Vortex
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest is a Backtesting module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest
The Giga Stacks Backtest module allows users to perform backtesting on Long and Short signals from the confluence of GKD-B Baseline, GKD-C Confirmation, and GKD-V Volatility/Volume indicators. This module encompasses two types of backtests: Trading and Full. The Trading backtest permits users to evaluate individual trades, whether Long or Short, one at a time. Conversely, the Full backtest allows users to analyze either Longs or Shorts separately by toggling between them in the settings, enabling the examination of results for each signal type. The Trading backtest emulates actual trading conditions, while the Full backtest assesses all signals, regardless of being Long or Short.
Additionally, this backtest module provides the option to test using indicators with 1 to 3 take profits and 1 stop loss. The Trading backtest allows for the use of 1 to 3 take profits, while the Full backtest is limited to 1 take profit. The Trading backtest also offers the capability to apply a trailing take profit.
In terms of the percentage of trade removed at each take profit, this backtest module has the following hardcoded values:
Take profit 1: 50% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 2: 25% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 3: 25% of the trade is removed.
Stop loss: 100% of the trade is removed.
After each take profit is achieved, the stop loss level is adjusted. When take profit 1 is reached, the stop loss is moved to the entry point. Similarly, when take profit 2 is reached, the stop loss is shifted to take profit 1. The trailing take profit feature comes into play after take profit 2 or take profit 3, depending on the number of take profits selected in the settings. The trailing take profit is always activated on the final take profit when 2 or more take profits are chosen.
The backtest module also offers the capability to restrict by a specific date range, allowing for simulated forward testing based on past data. Additionally, users have the option to display or hide a trading panel that provides relevant information about the backtest, statistics, and the current trade. It is also possible to activate alerts and toggle sections of the trading panel on or off. On the chart, historical take profit and stop loss levels are represented by horizontal lines overlaid for reference.
To utilize this strategy, follow these steps (where "Stack XX" denotes the number of the Stack):
GKD-B Baseline Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-B Baseline module into the GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest module setting named "Stack XX: Import GKD-C, GKD-B, or GKD-V."
GKD-V Volatility/Volume Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-V Volatility/Volume module into the GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest module setting named "Stack XX: Import GKD-C, GKD-B, or GKD-V."
GKD-C Confirmation Import: 1) Adjust the "Confirmation Type" in the GKD-C Confirmation Indicator to "GKD New."; 2) Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-C Confirmation module into the GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest module setting named "Stack XX: Import GKD-C, GKD-B, or GKD."
█ Giga Stacks Backtest Entries
Entries are generated form the confluence of up to six GKD-B Baseline, GKD-C Confirmation, and GKD-V Volatility/Volume indicators. Signals are generated when all Stacks reach uptrend or downtrend together.
Here's how this works. Assume we have the following Stacks and their respective trend on the current candle:
Stack 1 indicator is in uptreend
Stack 2 indicator is in downtrend
Stack 3 indicator is in uptreend
Stack 4 indicator is in uptreend
All stacks are in uptrend except for Stack 2. If Stack 2 reaches uptrend while Stacks 1, 3, and 4 stay in uptrend, then a long signal is generated. The last Stack to align with all other Stacks will generate a long or short signal.
█ Volatility Types Included
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses. Each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. Users can also adjust the multiplier values in the settings.
This module includes 17 types of volatility:
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
Close-to-Close
Close-to-Close volatility is a classic and widely used volatility measure, sometimes referred to as historical volatility.
Volatility is an indicator of the speed of a stock price change. A stock with high volatility is one where the price changes rapidly and with a larger amplitude. The more volatile a stock is, the riskier it is.
Close-to-close historical volatility is calculated using only a stock's closing prices. It is the simplest volatility estimator. However, in many cases, it is not precise enough. Stock prices could jump significantly during a trading session and return to the opening value at the end. That means that a considerable amount of price information is not taken into account by close-to-close volatility.
Despite its drawbacks, Close-to-Close volatility is still useful in cases where the instrument doesn't have intraday prices. For example, mutual funds calculate their net asset values daily or weekly, and thus their prices are not suitable for more sophisticated volatility estimators.
Parkinson
Parkinson volatility is a volatility measure that uses the stock’s high and low price of the day.
The main difference between regular volatility and Parkinson volatility is that the latter uses high and low prices for a day, rather than only the closing price. This is useful as close-to-close prices could show little difference while large price movements could have occurred during the day. Thus, Parkinson's volatility is considered more precise and requires less data for calculation than close-to-close volatility.
One drawback of this estimator is that it doesn't take into account price movements after the market closes. Hence, it systematically undervalues volatility. This drawback is addressed in the Garman-Klass volatility estimator.
Garman-Klass
Garman-Klass is a volatility estimator that incorporates open, low, high, and close prices of a security.
Garman-Klass volatility extends Parkinson's volatility by taking into account the opening and closing prices. As markets are most active during the opening and closing of a trading session, it makes volatility estimation more accurate.
Garman and Klass also assumed that the process of price change follows a continuous diffusion process (Geometric Brownian motion). However, this assumption has several drawbacks. The method is not robust for opening jumps in price and trend movements.
Despite its drawbacks, the Garman-Klass estimator is still more effective than the basic formula since it takes into account not only the price at the beginning and end of the time interval but also intraday price extremes.
Researchers Rogers and Satchell have proposed a more efficient method for assessing historical volatility that takes into account price trends. See Rogers-Satchell Volatility for more detail.
Rogers-Satchell
Rogers-Satchell is an estimator for measuring the volatility of securities with an average return not equal to zero.
Unlike Parkinson and Garman-Klass estimators, Rogers-Satchell incorporates a drift term (mean return not equal to zero). As a result, it provides better volatility estimation when the underlying is trending.
The main disadvantage of this method is that it does not take into account price movements between trading sessions. This leads to an underestimation of volatility since price jumps periodically occur in the market precisely at the moments between sessions.
A more comprehensive estimator that also considers the gaps between sessions was developed based on the Rogers-Satchel formula in the 2000s by Yang-Zhang. See Yang Zhang Volatility for more detail.
Yang-Zhang
Yang Zhang is a historical volatility estimator that handles both opening jumps and the drift and has a minimum estimation error.
Yang-Zhang volatility can be thought of as a combination of the overnight (close-to-open volatility) and a weighted average of the Rogers-Satchell volatility and the day’s open-to-close volatility. It is considered to be 14 times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator.
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang (GKYZ) volatility estimator incorporates the returns of open, high, low, and closing prices in its calculation.
GKYZ volatility estimator takes into account overnight jumps but not the trend, i.e., it assumes that the underlying asset follows a Geometric Brownian Motion (GBM) process with zero drift. Therefore, the GKYZ volatility estimator tends to overestimate the volatility when the drift is different from zero. However, for a GBM process, this estimator is eight times more efficient than the close-to-close volatility estimator.
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
The Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) is a quantitative or statistical measure used to model or describe a time series. The EWMA is widely used in finance, with the main applications being technical analysis and volatility modeling.
The moving average is designed such that older observations are given lower weights. The weights decrease exponentially as the data point gets older – hence the name exponentially weighted.
The only decision a user of the EWMA must make is the parameter lambda. The parameter decides how important the current observation is in the calculation of the EWMA. The higher the value of lambda, the more closely the EWMA tracks the original time series.
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
This is the simplest calculation of volatility. It's the standard deviation of ln(close/close(1)).
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
This is calculated using a short- and long-run mean of variance multiplied by ?.
?avg(var;M) + (1 ? ?) avg(var;N) = 2?var/(M+1-(M-1)L) + 2(1-?)var/(M+1-(M-1)L)
Solving for ? can be done by minimizing the mean squared error of estimation; that is, regressing L^-1var - avg(var; N) against avg(var; M) - avg(var; N) and using the resulting beta estimate as ?.
Average True Range
The average true range (ATR) is a technical analysis indicator, introduced by market technician J. Welles Wilder Jr. in his book New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems, that measures market volatility by decomposing the entire range of an asset price for that period.
The true range indicator is taken as the greatest of the following: current high less the current low; the absolute value of the current high less the previous close; and the absolute value of the current low less the previous close. The ATR is then a moving average, generally using 14 days, of the true ranges.
True Range Double
A special case of ATR that attempts to correct for volatility skew.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation is a statistic that measures the dispersion of a dataset relative to its mean and is calculated as the square root of the variance. The standard deviation is calculated as the square root of variance by determining each data point's deviation relative to the mean. If the data points are further from the mean, there is a higher deviation within the data set; thus, the more spread out the data, the higher the standard deviation.
Adaptive Deviation
By definition, the Standard Deviation (STD, also represented by the Greek letter sigma ? or the Latin letter s) is a measure that is used to quantify the amount of variation or dispersion of a set of data values. In technical analysis, we usually use it to measure the level of current volatility.
Standard Deviation is based on Simple Moving Average calculation for mean value. This version of standard deviation uses the properties of EMA to calculate what can be called a new type of deviation, and since it is based on EMA, we can call it EMA deviation. Additionally, Perry Kaufman's efficiency ratio is used to make it adaptive (since all EMA type calculations are nearly perfect for adapting).
The difference when compared to the standard is significant--not just because of EMA usage, but the efficiency ratio makes it a "bit more logical" in very volatile market conditions.
Median Absolute Deviation
The median absolute deviation is a measure of statistical dispersion. Moreover, the MAD is a robust statistic, being more resilient to outliers in a data set than the standard deviation. In the standard deviation, the distances from the mean are squared, so large deviations are weighted more heavily, and thus outliers can heavily influence it. In the MAD, the deviations of a small number of outliers are irrelevant.
Because the MAD is a more robust estimator of scale than the sample variance or standard deviation, it works better with distributions without a mean or variance, such as the Cauchy distribution.
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Average True Range (ATR) is a widely used indicator for many occasions in technical analysis. It is calculated as the RMA of the true range. This version adds a "twist": it uses Perry Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio to calculate adaptive true range.
Mean Absolute Deviation
The mean absolute deviation (MAD) is a measure of variability that indicates the average distance between observations and their mean. MAD uses the original units of the data, which simplifies interpretation. Larger values signify that the data points spread out further from the average. Conversely, lower values correspond to data points bunching closer to it. The mean absolute deviation is also known as the mean deviation and average absolute deviation.
This definition of the mean absolute deviation sounds similar to the standard deviation (SD). While both measure variability, they have different calculations. In recent years, some proponents of MAD have suggested that it replace the SD as the primary measure because it is a simpler concept that better fits real life.
Static Percent
Static Percent allows the user to insert their own constant percent that will then be used to create take profits and stoploss
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Stacks Backtest
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Vorext
Confirmation 2: Coppock Curve
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Super Complex Backtest [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Super Complex Backtest is a Backtesting module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Super Complex Backtest
The Solo Confirmation Super Complex Backtest module allows users to perform backtesting on Full GKD Long and Short signals using GKD-C confirmation indicators. These signals are further refined by GKD-B Baseline and GKD-V Volatility/Volume indicators and augmented by an additional GKD-C Confirmation indicator acting as a Continuation indicator. This module serves as a comprehensive tool that falls just below a Full GKD trading system. The key difference is that the GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Super Complex utilizes a single GKD-C Confirmation indicator, while the Full GKD system employs two GKD-C Confirmation indicators. Both the Solo Confirmation Super Complex and the Full GKD systems incorporate an extra GKD-C Confirmation indicator to identify Continuation signals, which provide both longs and shorts on developing trends following an initial trend change.
This module encompasses two types of backtests: Trading and Full. The Trading backtest permits users to evaluate individual trades, whether Long or Short, one at a time. Conversely, the Full backtest allows users to analyze either Longs or Shorts separately by toggling between them in the settings, enabling the examination of results for each signal type. The Trading backtest emulates actual trading conditions, while the Full backtest assesses all signals, regardless of being Long or Short.
Additionally, this backtest module provides the option to test the core GKD-C Confirmation and GKD-C Continuation indicators with 1 to 3 take profits and 1 stop loss. The Trading backtest allows for the use of 1 to 3 take profits, while the Full backtest is limited to 1 take profit. The Trading backtest also offers the capability to apply a trailing take profit.
In terms of the percentage of trade removed at each take profit, this backtest module has the following hardcoded values:
Take profit 1: 50% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 2: 25% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 3: 25% of the trade is removed.
Stop loss: 100% of the trade is removed.
After each take profit is achieved, the stop loss level is adjusted. When take profit 1 is reached, the stop loss is moved to the entry point. Similarly, when take profit 2 is reached, the stop loss is shifted to take profit 1. The trailing take profit feature comes into play after take profit 2 or take profit 3, depending on the number of take profits selected in the settings. The trailing take profit is always activated on the final take profit when 2 or more take profits are chosen.
The backtest module also offers the capability to restrict by a specific date range, allowing for simulated forward testing based on past data. Additionally, users have the option to display or hide a trading panel that provides relevant information about the backtest, statistics, and the current trade. It is also possible to activate alerts and toggle sections of the trading panel on or off. On the chart, historical take profit and stop loss levels are represented by horizontal lines overlaid for reference.
To utilize this strategy, follow these steps:
1. GKD-B Baseline Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-B Baseline module into the GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Super Complex Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-B Baseline."
2. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-V Volatility/Volume module into the GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Super Complex Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-V Volatility/Volume."
3. Adjust the "Confirmation Type" in the GKD-C Confirmation Indicator to "GKD New."
4. GKD-C Confirmation Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-C Confirmation module into the GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Super Complex Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-C Confirmation."
5. Adjust the "Confirmation Type" in the GKD-C Continuation Indicator to "GKD New."
6. GKD-C Continuation Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-C Continuation module into the GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Super Complex Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-C Continuation."
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses. Each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. Users can also adjust the multiplier values in the settings.
In a future update, the option to include a GKD-E Exit indicator will be added to this module to complete a full trading strategy.
█ Solo Confirmation Super Complex Backtest Entries
Within this module, there are eight distinct types of entries available, which are outlined below:
Standard Entry
1-Candle Standard Entry
Baseline Entry
1-Candle Baseline Entry
Volatility/Volume Entry
1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry
PullBack Entry
Continuation Entry
Each of these entry types can generate either long or short signals, resulting in a total of 16 signal variations. The user has the flexibility to enable or disable specific entry types and choose which qualifying rules within each entry type are applied to price to determine the final long or short signal. You'll notice that these signals are different form the core GKD signals mentioned towards the end of this description. Signals from the GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Super Complex Backtest are modifided to add additional qualifications to make your finalized trading strategy more dynamic and robust.
The following section provides an overview of the various entry types and their corresponding qualifying rules:
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2. Baseline agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Standard Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2a. Baseline agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
Next Candle:
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Basline gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Volatility/Volume agrees
6. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
1-Candle Baseline Entry
1a. GKD-B Basline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle:
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Baseline agrees
6. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry
1a. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSVVC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle:
1b. Price retraced
2b. Volatility/Volume agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
2b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, 1-Candle Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, 1-Candle Baseline Entry, Volatility/Volume Entry, 1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry, or Pullback entry triggered previously
2. Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
4. Confirmation 1 agrees
5. Baseline agrees
█ Volatility Types Included
This module includes 17 types of volatility:
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
Close-to-Close
Close-to-Close volatility is a classic and widely used volatility measure, sometimes referred to as historical volatility.
Volatility is an indicator of the speed of a stock price change. A stock with high volatility is one where the price changes rapidly and with a larger amplitude. The more volatile a stock is, the riskier it is.
Close-to-close historical volatility is calculated using only a stock's closing prices. It is the simplest volatility estimator. However, in many cases, it is not precise enough. Stock prices could jump significantly during a trading session and return to the opening value at the end. That means that a considerable amount of price information is not taken into account by close-to-close volatility.
Despite its drawbacks, Close-to-Close volatility is still useful in cases where the instrument doesn't have intraday prices. For example, mutual funds calculate their net asset values daily or weekly, and thus their prices are not suitable for more sophisticated volatility estimators.
Parkinson
Parkinson volatility is a volatility measure that uses the stock’s high and low price of the day.
The main difference between regular volatility and Parkinson volatility is that the latter uses high and low prices for a day, rather than only the closing price. This is useful as close-to-close prices could show little difference while large price movements could have occurred during the day. Thus, Parkinson's volatility is considered more precise and requires less data for calculation than close-to-close volatility.
One drawback of this estimator is that it doesn't take into account price movements after the market closes. Hence, it systematically undervalues volatility. This drawback is addressed in the Garman-Klass volatility estimator.
Garman-Klass
Garman-Klass is a volatility estimator that incorporates open, low, high, and close prices of a security.
Garman-Klass volatility extends Parkinson's volatility by taking into account the opening and closing prices. As markets are most active during the opening and closing of a trading session, it makes volatility estimation more accurate.
Garman and Klass also assumed that the process of price change follows a continuous diffusion process (Geometric Brownian motion). However, this assumption has several drawbacks. The method is not robust for opening jumps in price and trend movements.
Despite its drawbacks, the Garman-Klass estimator is still more effective than the basic formula since it takes into account not only the price at the beginning and end of the time interval but also intraday price extremes.
Researchers Rogers and Satchell have proposed a more efficient method for assessing historical volatility that takes into account price trends. See Rogers-Satchell Volatility for more detail.
Rogers-Satchell
Rogers-Satchell is an estimator for measuring the volatility of securities with an average return not equal to zero.
Unlike Parkinson and Garman-Klass estimators, Rogers-Satchell incorporates a drift term (mean return not equal to zero). As a result, it provides better volatility estimation when the underlying is trending.
The main disadvantage of this method is that it does not take into account price movements between trading sessions. This leads to an underestimation of volatility since price jumps periodically occur in the market precisely at the moments between sessions.
A more comprehensive estimator that also considers the gaps between sessions was developed based on the Rogers-Satchel formula in the 2000s by Yang-Zhang. See Yang Zhang Volatility for more detail.
Yang-Zhang
Yang Zhang is a historical volatility estimator that handles both opening jumps and the drift and has a minimum estimation error.
Yang-Zhang volatility can be thought of as a combination of the overnight (close-to-open volatility) and a weighted average of the Rogers-Satchell volatility and the day’s open-to-close volatility. It is considered to be 14 times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator.
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang (GKYZ) volatility estimator incorporates the returns of open, high, low, and closing prices in its calculation.
GKYZ volatility estimator takes into account overnight jumps but not the trend, i.e., it assumes that the underlying asset follows a Geometric Brownian Motion (GBM) process with zero drift. Therefore, the GKYZ volatility estimator tends to overestimate the volatility when the drift is different from zero. However, for a GBM process, this estimator is eight times more efficient than the close-to-close volatility estimator.
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
The Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) is a quantitative or statistical measure used to model or describe a time series. The EWMA is widely used in finance, with the main applications being technical analysis and volatility modeling.
The moving average is designed such that older observations are given lower weights. The weights decrease exponentially as the data point gets older – hence the name exponentially weighted.
The only decision a user of the EWMA must make is the parameter lambda. The parameter decides how important the current observation is in the calculation of the EWMA. The higher the value of lambda, the more closely the EWMA tracks the original time series.
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
This is the simplest calculation of volatility. It's the standard deviation of ln(close/close(1)).
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
This is calculated using a short- and long-run mean of variance multiplied by ?.
?avg(var;M) + (1 ? ?) avg(var;N) = 2?var/(M+1-(M-1)L) + 2(1-?)var/(M+1-(M-1)L)
Solving for ? can be done by minimizing the mean squared error of estimation; that is, regressing L^-1var - avg(var; N) against avg(var; M) - avg(var; N) and using the resulting beta estimate as ?.
Average True Range
The average true range (ATR) is a technical analysis indicator, introduced by market technician J. Welles Wilder Jr. in his book New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems, that measures market volatility by decomposing the entire range of an asset price for that period.
The true range indicator is taken as the greatest of the following: current high less the current low; the absolute value of the current high less the previous close; and the absolute value of the current low less the previous close. The ATR is then a moving average, generally using 14 days, of the true ranges.
True Range Double
A special case of ATR that attempts to correct for volatility skew.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation is a statistic that measures the dispersion of a dataset relative to its mean and is calculated as the square root of the variance. The standard deviation is calculated as the square root of variance by determining each data point's deviation relative to the mean. If the data points are further from the mean, there is a higher deviation within the data set; thus, the more spread out the data, the higher the standard deviation.
Adaptive Deviation
By definition, the Standard Deviation (STD, also represented by the Greek letter sigma ? or the Latin letter s) is a measure that is used to quantify the amount of variation or dispersion of a set of data values. In technical analysis, we usually use it to measure the level of current volatility.
Standard Deviation is based on Simple Moving Average calculation for mean value. This version of standard deviation uses the properties of EMA to calculate what can be called a new type of deviation, and since it is based on EMA, we can call it EMA deviation. Additionally, Perry Kaufman's efficiency ratio is used to make it adaptive (since all EMA type calculations are nearly perfect for adapting).
The difference when compared to the standard is significant--not just because of EMA usage, but the efficiency ratio makes it a "bit more logical" in very volatile market conditions.
Median Absolute Deviation
The median absolute deviation is a measure of statistical dispersion. Moreover, the MAD is a robust statistic, being more resilient to outliers in a data set than the standard deviation. In the standard deviation, the distances from the mean are squared, so large deviations are weighted more heavily, and thus outliers can heavily influence it. In the MAD, the deviations of a small number of outliers are irrelevant.
Because the MAD is a more robust estimator of scale than the sample variance or standard deviation, it works better with distributions without a mean or variance, such as the Cauchy distribution.
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Average True Range (ATR) is a widely used indicator for many occasions in technical analysis. It is calculated as the RMA of the true range. This version adds a "twist": it uses Perry Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio to calculate adaptive true range.
Mean Absolute Deviation
The mean absolute deviation (MAD) is a measure of variability that indicates the average distance between observations and their mean. MAD uses the original units of the data, which simplifies interpretation. Larger values signify that the data points spread out further from the average. Conversely, lower values correspond to data points bunching closer to it. The mean absolute deviation is also known as the mean deviation and average absolute deviation.
This definition of the mean absolute deviation sounds similar to the standard deviation (SD). While both measure variability, they have different calculations. In recent years, some proponents of MAD have suggested that it replace the SD as the primary measure because it is a simpler concept that better fits real life.
Static Percent
Static Percent allows the user to insert their own constant percent that will then be used to create take profits and stoploss
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest as shown on the chart above
Baseline: Hull Moving Average as shown on the chart above
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: Fisher Trasnform as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Vortex as shown on the chart above
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest is a Backtesting module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest
The Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest module enables users to perform backtesting on Standard Long and Short signals from GKD-C confirmation indicators, filtered by GKD-B Baseline and GKD-V Volatility/Volume indicators. This module represents a complex form of the Solo Confirmation Backtest in the GKD trading system. It includes two types of backtests: Trading and Full. The Trading backtest allows users to test individual trades, both Long and Short, one at a time. On the other hand, the Full backtest allows users to test either Longs or Shorts by toggling between them in the settings to view the results for each signal type. The Trading backtest simulates real trading, while the Full backtest tests all signals, whether Long or Short.
Additionally, this backtest module provides the option to test the GKD-C Confirmation indicator with 1 to 3 take profits and 1 stop loss. The Trading backtest allows for the use of 1 to 3 take profits, while the Full backtest is limited to 1 take profit. The Trading backtest also offers the capability to apply a trailing take profit.
In terms of the percentage of trade removed at each take profit, this backtest module has the following hardcoded values:
Take profit 1: 50% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 2: 25% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 3: 25% of the trade is removed.
Stop loss: 100% of the trade is removed.
After each take profit is achieved, the stop loss level is adjusted. When take profit 1 is reached, the stop loss is moved to the entry point. Similarly, when take profit 2 is reached, the stop loss is shifted to take profit 1. The trailing take profit feature comes into play after take profit 2 or take profit 3, depending on the number of take profits selected in the settings. The trailing take profit is always activated on the final take profit when 2 or more take profits are chosen.
The backtest module also offers the capability to restrict by a specific date range, allowing for simulated forward testing based on past data. Additionally, users have the option to display or hide a trading panel that provides relevant information about the backtest, statistics, and the current trade. It is also possible to activate alerts and toggle sections of the trading panel on or off. On the chart, historical take profit and stop loss levels are represented by horizontal lines overlaid for reference.
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses. Each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. Users can also adjust the multiplier values in the settings.
To utilize this strategy, follow these steps:
1. GKD-B Baseline Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-B Baseline module into the GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-B Baseline indicator."
Adjust the "Confirmation Type" in the GKD-C Confirmation Indicator to "GKD New."
2. GKD-C Confirmation Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-C Confirmation module into the GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-C Confirmation indicator."
3. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-V Volatility/Volume module into the GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-V Volatility/Volume indicator."
4. The Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest module exclusively supports Standard Entries, both Long and Short. However, please note that this module uses a modified version of the Standard Entry. In this modified version, long and short signals are directly imported from the Confirmation indicator, and then baseline and volatility filtering is applied.
The GKD-B Baseline filter ensures that only trades aligning with the GKD-B Baseline's current trend are accepted. This filter takes into consideration the Goldie Locks Zone, which allows trades where the closing price of the last candle has moved within a minimum XX volatility and a maximum YY volatility range. The GKD-V Volatility/Volume filter allows only trades that meet a minimum threshold of ZZ GKD-V Volatility/Volume, which varies based on the specific GKD-V Volatility/Volume indicator used.
The Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest execution engine determines whether signals from the GKD-C Confirmation indicator are accepted or rejected based on two criteria:
1. The GKD-C Confirmation signal must be qualified by the direction of the GKD-B Baseline trend and the GKD-B Baseline's sweet-spot Goldie Locks Zone.
2. Sufficient Volatility/Volume, as indicated by the GKD-V Volatility/Volume indicator, must be present to execute a trade.
The purpose of the Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest is to test a GKD-C Confirmation indicator in the presence of macro trend and volatility/volume filtering.
Volatility Types Included
17 types of volatility are included in this indicator
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
Close-to-Close
Close-to-Close volatility is a classic and widely used volatility measure, sometimes referred to as historical volatility.
Volatility is an indicator of the speed of a stock price change. A stock with high volatility is one where the price changes rapidly and with a larger amplitude. The more volatile a stock is, the riskier it is.
Close-to-close historical volatility is calculated using only a stock's closing prices. It is the simplest volatility estimator. However, in many cases, it is not precise enough. Stock prices could jump significantly during a trading session and return to the opening value at the end. That means that a considerable amount of price information is not taken into account by close-to-close volatility.
Despite its drawbacks, Close-to-Close volatility is still useful in cases where the instrument doesn't have intraday prices. For example, mutual funds calculate their net asset values daily or weekly, and thus their prices are not suitable for more sophisticated volatility estimators.
Parkinson
Parkinson volatility is a volatility measure that uses the stock’s high and low price of the day.
The main difference between regular volatility and Parkinson volatility is that the latter uses high and low prices for a day, rather than only the closing price. This is useful as close-to-close prices could show little difference while large price movements could have occurred during the day. Thus, Parkinson's volatility is considered more precise and requires less data for calculation than close-to-close volatility.
One drawback of this estimator is that it doesn't take into account price movements after the market closes. Hence, it systematically undervalues volatility. This drawback is addressed in the Garman-Klass volatility estimator.
Garman-Klass
Garman-Klass is a volatility estimator that incorporates open, low, high, and close prices of a security.
Garman-Klass volatility extends Parkinson's volatility by taking into account the opening and closing prices. As markets are most active during the opening and closing of a trading session, it makes volatility estimation more accurate.
Garman and Klass also assumed that the process of price change follows a continuous diffusion process (Geometric Brownian motion). However, this assumption has several drawbacks. The method is not robust for opening jumps in price and trend movements.
Despite its drawbacks, the Garman-Klass estimator is still more effective than the basic formula since it takes into account not only the price at the beginning and end of the time interval but also intraday price extremes.
Researchers Rogers and Satchell have proposed a more efficient method for assessing historical volatility that takes into account price trends. See Rogers-Satchell Volatility for more detail.
Rogers-Satchell
Rogers-Satchell is an estimator for measuring the volatility of securities with an average return not equal to zero.
Unlike Parkinson and Garman-Klass estimators, Rogers-Satchell incorporates a drift term (mean return not equal to zero). As a result, it provides better volatility estimation when the underlying is trending.
The main disadvantage of this method is that it does not take into account price movements between trading sessions. This leads to an underestimation of volatility since price jumps periodically occur in the market precisely at the moments between sessions.
A more comprehensive estimator that also considers the gaps between sessions was developed based on the Rogers-Satchel formula in the 2000s by Yang-Zhang. See Yang Zhang Volatility for more detail.
Yang-Zhang
Yang Zhang is a historical volatility estimator that handles both opening jumps and the drift and has a minimum estimation error.
Yang-Zhang volatility can be thought of as a combination of the overnight (close-to-open volatility) and a weighted average of the Rogers-Satchell volatility and the day’s open-to-close volatility. It is considered to be 14 times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator.
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang (GKYZ) volatility estimator incorporates the returns of open, high, low, and closing prices in its calculation.
GKYZ volatility estimator takes into account overnight jumps but not the trend, i.e., it assumes that the underlying asset follows a Geometric Brownian Motion (GBM) process with zero drift. Therefore, the GKYZ volatility estimator tends to overestimate the volatility when the drift is different from zero. However, for a GBM process, this estimator is eight times more efficient than the close-to-close volatility estimator.
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
The Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) is a quantitative or statistical measure used to model or describe a time series. The EWMA is widely used in finance, with the main applications being technical analysis and volatility modeling.
The moving average is designed such that older observations are given lower weights. The weights decrease exponentially as the data point gets older – hence the name exponentially weighted.
The only decision a user of the EWMA must make is the parameter lambda. The parameter decides how important the current observation is in the calculation of the EWMA. The higher the value of lambda, the more closely the EWMA tracks the original time series.
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
This is the simplest calculation of volatility. It's the standard deviation of ln(close/close(1)).
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
This is calculated using a short- and long-run mean of variance multiplied by ?.
?avg(var;M) + (1 ? ?) avg(var;N) = 2?var/(M+1-(M-1)L) + 2(1-?)var/(M+1-(M-1)L)
Solving for ? can be done by minimizing the mean squared error of estimation; that is, regressing L^-1var - avg(var; N) against avg(var; M) - avg(var; N) and using the resulting beta estimate as ?.
Average True Range
The average true range (ATR) is a technical analysis indicator, introduced by market technician J. Welles Wilder Jr. in his book New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems, that measures market volatility by decomposing the entire range of an asset price for that period.
The true range indicator is taken as the greatest of the following: current high less the current low; the absolute value of the current high less the previous close; and the absolute value of the current low less the previous close. The ATR is then a moving average, generally using 14 days, of the true ranges.
True Range Double
A special case of ATR that attempts to correct for volatility skew.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation is a statistic that measures the dispersion of a dataset relative to its mean and is calculated as the square root of the variance. The standard deviation is calculated as the square root of variance by determining each data point's deviation relative to the mean. If the data points are further from the mean, there is a higher deviation within the data set; thus, the more spread out the data, the higher the standard deviation.
Adaptive Deviation
By definition, the Standard Deviation (STD, also represented by the Greek letter sigma ? or the Latin letter s) is a measure that is used to quantify the amount of variation or dispersion of a set of data values. In technical analysis, we usually use it to measure the level of current volatility.
Standard Deviation is based on Simple Moving Average calculation for mean value. This version of standard deviation uses the properties of EMA to calculate what can be called a new type of deviation, and since it is based on EMA, we can call it EMA deviation. Additionally, Perry Kaufman's efficiency ratio is used to make it adaptive (since all EMA type calculations are nearly perfect for adapting).
The difference when compared to the standard is significant--not just because of EMA usage, but the efficiency ratio makes it a "bit more logical" in very volatile market conditions.
Median Absolute Deviation
The median absolute deviation is a measure of statistical dispersion. Moreover, the MAD is a robust statistic, being more resilient to outliers in a data set than the standard deviation. In the standard deviation, the distances from the mean are squared, so large deviations are weighted more heavily, and thus outliers can heavily influence it. In the MAD, the deviations of a small number of outliers are irrelevant.
Because the MAD is a more robust estimator of scale than the sample variance or standard deviation, it works better with distributions without a mean or variance, such as the Cauchy distribution.
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Average True Range (ATR) is a widely used indicator for many occasions in technical analysis. It is calculated as the RMA of the true range. This version adds a "twist": it uses Perry Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio to calculate adaptive true range.
Mean Absolute Deviation
The mean absolute deviation (MAD) is a measure of variability that indicates the average distance between observations and their mean. MAD uses the original units of the data, which simplifies interpretation. Larger values signify that the data points spread out further from the average. Conversely, lower values correspond to data points bunching closer to it. The mean absolute deviation is also known as the mean deviation and average absolute deviation.
This definition of the mean absolute deviation sounds similar to the standard deviation (SD). While both measure variability, they have different calculations. In recent years, some proponents of MAD have suggested that it replace the SD as the primary measure because it is a simpler concept that better fits real life.
Static Percent
Static Percent allows the user to insert their own constant percent that will then be used to create take profits and stoploss
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest as shown on the chart above
Baseline: Hull Moving Average as shown on the chart above
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: Fisher Trasnform as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Volatility-Adaptive Rapid RSI T3
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Simple Backtest [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Simple Backtest is a Backtesting module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Simple Backtest
The Solo Confirmation Simple Backtest module enables users to perform Standard Long and Short signals on GKD-C confirmation indicators. This module represents the simplest form of Backtest in the GKD trading system. It includes two types of backtests: Trading and Full. The Trading backtest allows users to test individual trades, both long and short, one at a time. On the other hand, the Full backtest allows users to test either longs or shorts by toggling between them in the settings to view the results for each signal type. The Trading backtest simulates real trading, while the Full backtest tests all signals, whether long or short.
Additionally, this backtest module provides the option to test the GKD-C indicator with 1 to 3 take profits and 1 stop loss. The Trading backtest allows for the use of 1 to 3 take profits, while the Full backtest is limited to 1 take profit. The Trading backtest also offers the capability to apply a trailing take profit.
In terms of the percentage of trade removed at each take profit, this backtest module has the following hardcoded values:
Take profit 1: 50% of the trade is removed
Take profit 2: 25% of the trade is removed
Take profit 3: 25% of the trade is removed
Stop loss: 100% of the trade is removed
After each take profit is achieved, the stop loss level is adjusted. When take profit 1 is reached, the stop loss is moved to the entry point. Similarly, when take profit 2 is reached, the stop loss is shifted to take profit 1. The trailing take profit feature comes into play after take profit 2 or take profit 3, depending on the number of take profits selected in the settings. The trailing take profit is always activated on the final take profit when 2 or more take profits are chosen.
The backtest also offers the capability to restrict by a specific date range, allowing for simulated forward testing based on past data. Additionally, users have the option to display or hide a trading panel that provides relevant information about the backtest, statistics, and the current trade. It is also possible to activate alerts and toggle sections of the trading panel on or off. On the chart, historical take profit and stop loss levels are represented by horizontal lines overlaid for reference.
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses. Each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. You can change the values of the multipliers in the settings as well.
To utilize this strategy, follow these steps:
1. Adjust the "Confirmation Type" in the GKD-C Confirmation Indicator to "GKD New."
2. Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" into the GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Simple Backtest module (this strategy backtest).
**The GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Simple Backtest module exclusively supports Standard Entries, both Long and Short. However, please note that this module uses a modified version of the standard entry, where long and short signals are directly imported from the Confirmation indicator without any baseline or volatility filtering applied.**
Volatility Types Included
17 types of volatility are included in this indicator
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
Close-to-Close
Close-to-Close volatility is a classic and widely used volatility measure, sometimes referred to as historical volatility.
Volatility is an indicator of the speed of a stock price change. A stock with high volatility is one where the price changes rapidly and with a larger amplitude. The more volatile a stock is, the riskier it is.
Close-to-close historical volatility is calculated using only a stock's closing prices. It is the simplest volatility estimator. However, in many cases, it is not precise enough. Stock prices could jump significantly during a trading session and return to the opening value at the end. That means that a considerable amount of price information is not taken into account by close-to-close volatility.
Despite its drawbacks, Close-to-Close volatility is still useful in cases where the instrument doesn't have intraday prices. For example, mutual funds calculate their net asset values daily or weekly, and thus their prices are not suitable for more sophisticated volatility estimators.
Parkinson
Parkinson volatility is a volatility measure that uses the stock’s high and low price of the day.
The main difference between regular volatility and Parkinson volatility is that the latter uses high and low prices for a day, rather than only the closing price. This is useful as close-to-close prices could show little difference while large price movements could have occurred during the day. Thus, Parkinson's volatility is considered more precise and requires less data for calculation than close-to-close volatility.
One drawback of this estimator is that it doesn't take into account price movements after the market closes. Hence, it systematically undervalues volatility. This drawback is addressed in the Garman-Klass volatility estimator.
Garman-Klass
Garman-Klass is a volatility estimator that incorporates open, low, high, and close prices of a security.
Garman-Klass volatility extends Parkinson's volatility by taking into account the opening and closing prices. As markets are most active during the opening and closing of a trading session, it makes volatility estimation more accurate.
Garman and Klass also assumed that the process of price change follows a continuous diffusion process (Geometric Brownian motion). However, this assumption has several drawbacks. The method is not robust for opening jumps in price and trend movements.
Despite its drawbacks, the Garman-Klass estimator is still more effective than the basic formula since it takes into account not only the price at the beginning and end of the time interval but also intraday price extremes.
Researchers Rogers and Satchell have proposed a more efficient method for assessing historical volatility that takes into account price trends. See Rogers-Satchell Volatility for more detail.
Rogers-Satchell
Rogers-Satchell is an estimator for measuring the volatility of securities with an average return not equal to zero.
Unlike Parkinson and Garman-Klass estimators, Rogers-Satchell incorporates a drift term (mean return not equal to zero). As a result, it provides better volatility estimation when the underlying is trending.
The main disadvantage of this method is that it does not take into account price movements between trading sessions. This leads to an underestimation of volatility since price jumps periodically occur in the market precisely at the moments between sessions.
A more comprehensive estimator that also considers the gaps between sessions was developed based on the Rogers-Satchel formula in the 2000s by Yang-Zhang. See Yang Zhang Volatility for more detail.
Yang-Zhang
Yang Zhang is a historical volatility estimator that handles both opening jumps and the drift and has a minimum estimation error.
Yang-Zhang volatility can be thought of as a combination of the overnight (close-to-open volatility) and a weighted average of the Rogers-Satchell volatility and the day’s open-to-close volatility. It is considered to be 14 times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator.
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang (GKYZ) volatility estimator incorporates the returns of open, high, low, and closing prices in its calculation.
GKYZ volatility estimator takes into account overnight jumps but not the trend, i.e., it assumes that the underlying asset follows a Geometric Brownian Motion (GBM) process with zero drift. Therefore, the GKYZ volatility estimator tends to overestimate the volatility when the drift is different from zero. However, for a GBM process, this estimator is eight times more efficient than the close-to-close volatility estimator.
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
The Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) is a quantitative or statistical measure used to model or describe a time series. The EWMA is widely used in finance, with the main applications being technical analysis and volatility modeling.
The moving average is designed such that older observations are given lower weights. The weights decrease exponentially as the data point gets older – hence the name exponentially weighted.
The only decision a user of the EWMA must make is the parameter lambda. The parameter decides how important the current observation is in the calculation of the EWMA. The higher the value of lambda, the more closely the EWMA tracks the original time series.
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
This is the simplest calculation of volatility. It's the standard deviation of ln(close/close(1)).
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
This is calculated using a short- and long-run mean of variance multiplied by ?.
?avg(var;M) + (1 ? ?) avg(var;N) = 2?var/(M+1-(M-1)L) + 2(1-?)var/(M+1-(M-1)L)
Solving for ? can be done by minimizing the mean squared error of estimation; that is, regressing L^-1var - avg(var; N) against avg(var; M) - avg(var; N) and using the resulting beta estimate as ?.
Average True Range
The average true range (ATR) is a technical analysis indicator, introduced by market technician J. Welles Wilder Jr. in his book New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems, that measures market volatility by decomposing the entire range of an asset price for that period.
The true range indicator is taken as the greatest of the following: current high less the current low; the absolute value of the current high less the previous close; and the absolute value of the current low less the previous close. The ATR is then a moving average, generally using 14 days, of the true ranges.
True Range Double
A special case of ATR that attempts to correct for volatility skew.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation is a statistic that measures the dispersion of a dataset relative to its mean and is calculated as the square root of the variance. The standard deviation is calculated as the square root of variance by determining each data point's deviation relative to the mean. If the data points are further from the mean, there is a higher deviation within the data set; thus, the more spread out the data, the higher the standard deviation.
Adaptive Deviation
By definition, the Standard Deviation (STD, also represented by the Greek letter sigma ? or the Latin letter s) is a measure that is used to quantify the amount of variation or dispersion of a set of data values. In technical analysis, we usually use it to measure the level of current volatility.
Standard Deviation is based on Simple Moving Average calculation for mean value. This version of standard deviation uses the properties of EMA to calculate what can be called a new type of deviation, and since it is based on EMA, we can call it EMA deviation. Additionally, Perry Kaufman's efficiency ratio is used to make it adaptive (since all EMA type calculations are nearly perfect for adapting).
The difference when compared to the standard is significant--not just because of EMA usage, but the efficiency ratio makes it a "bit more logical" in very volatile market conditions.
Median Absolute Deviation
The median absolute deviation is a measure of statistical dispersion. Moreover, the MAD is a robust statistic, being more resilient to outliers in a data set than the standard deviation. In the standard deviation, the distances from the mean are squared, so large deviations are weighted more heavily, and thus outliers can heavily influence it. In the MAD, the deviations of a small number of outliers are irrelevant.
Because the MAD is a more robust estimator of scale than the sample variance or standard deviation, it works better with distributions without a mean or variance, such as the Cauchy distribution.
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Average True Range (ATR) is a widely used indicator for many occasions in technical analysis. It is calculated as the RMA of the true range. This version adds a "twist": it uses Perry Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio to calculate adaptive true range.
Mean Absolute Deviation
The mean absolute deviation (MAD) is a measure of variability that indicates the average distance between observations and their mean. MAD uses the original units of the data, which simplifies interpretation. Larger values signify that the data points spread out further from the average. Conversely, lower values correspond to data points bunching closer to it. The mean absolute deviation is also known as the mean deviation and average absolute deviation.
This definition of the mean absolute deviation sounds similar to the standard deviation (SD). While both measure variability, they have different calculations. In recent years, some proponents of MAD have suggested that it replace the SD as the primary measure because it is a simpler concept that better fits real life.
Static Percent
Static Percent allows the user to insert their own constant percent that will then be used to create take profits and stoploss
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Solo Confirmation Simple Backtest as shown on the chart above
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Fisher Trasnform as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Volatility-Adaptive Rapid RSI T3
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
GKD-C QQE of Variety RSI [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C QQE of Variety RSI is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-C QQE of Variety RSI
QQE: A Comprehensive Alternative to the Relative Strength Index
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) is a popular technical indicator that measures the speed and change of price movements to help traders identify potential trend reversals, overbought, and oversold conditions. Although the RSI is widely used, it has its limitations, and traders often seek alternative or complementary indicators to improve their market analysis. One such alternative is the Qualitative Quantitative Estimation (QQE) indicator, a comprehensive oscillator that combines the features of the RSI with additional smoothing and volatility adjustments. In the following, we will explore the QQE indicator, its calculation, and its potential benefits compared to using any type of RSI alone.
QQE Indicator
The QQE indicator was developed by an unknown author and is based on the RSI with additional modifications to enhance its performance. The QQE calculation involves three main steps:
1. The first step is to compute the RSI value for a specified period using the traditional RSI formula.
2. The second step is to apply a smoothing technique, such as the Wilder's smoothing or an exponential moving average (EMA), to the RSI value, resulting in the smoothed RSI.
3. The third step is to calculate the volatility-adjusted upper and lower bands (referred to as the QQE lines) around the smoothed RSI using an ATR-based (Average True Range) multiplier.
The QQE indicator is typically displayed as an oscillator with the smoothed RSI line in the middle and the upper and lower QQE lines acting as dynamic boundaries.
Comparison with the RSI
To better understand the potential benefits of the QQE indicator compared to using any type of RSI alone, let's examine its key features and how they may contribute to improved market analysis.
Advantages
1. The QQE indicator provides a more comprehensive view of the market by combining the strengths of the RSI with additional smoothing and volatility adjustments. This may result in a more reliable and accurate reflection of market conditions and price trends.
2. The smoothed RSI line in the QQE oscillator can help filter out noise and reduce the number of false signals often experienced when using the traditional RSI alone, making it easier for traders to identify genuine trend reversals and trading opportunities.
3. The dynamic QQE lines offer an additional layer of information by accounting for market volatility. This can help traders to better gauge the strength of price movements and identify potential support and resistance levels.
4. The QQE indicator can be used as a standalone tool or in combination with other technical indicators, providing traders with greater flexibility in their market analysis.
Disadvantages
1. The QQE indicator may be more complex to understand and implement than the traditional RSI due to the additional smoothing and volatility adjustments involved in its calculation.
2. As the QQE indicator is less widely known and used than the RSI, traders may find it more challenging to find resources and support for incorporating this indicator into their trading strategies.
Conclusion:
The QQE indicator is a versatile and comprehensive alternative to the traditional RSI, offering potential benefits in terms of noise reduction, volatility adjustment, and improved market analysis. However, it is important to recognize its limitations, such as increased complexity and limited resources compared to the RSI. Traders should carefully consider the potential advantages and drawbacks of using the QQE indicator before integrating it into their trading strategies. Ultimately, the choice between the QQE and any type of RSI will depend on individual traders' preferences and the specific market conditions they are analyzing.
This indicator includes 3 types of signals
1. Middle cross
2. Levels cross
3. Slow Trend cross
This indicator includes 9 types of RSI
1. Regular RSI
2. Slow RSI
3. Ehlers Smoothed RSI
4. Cutler's RSI or Rapid RSI
5. RSI T3
6. RSI DEMA
7. Harris' RSI
8. RSI TEMA
9. Jurik RSX
Regular RSI
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) is a widely used technical indicator in the field of financial market analysis. Developed by J. Welles Wilder Jr. in 1978, the RSI is a momentum oscillator that measures the speed and change of price movements. It helps traders identify potential trend reversals, overbought, and oversold conditions in a market.
The RSI is calculated based on the average gains and losses of an asset over a specified period, typically 14 days. The formula for calculating the RSI is as follows:
RSI = 100 - (100 / (1 + RS))
Where:
RS (Relative Strength) = Average gain over the specified period / Average loss over the specified period
The RSI ranges from 0 to 100, with values above 70 generally considered overbought (potentially indicating that the asset is overvalued and may experience a price decline) and values below 30 considered oversold (potentially indicating that the asset is undervalued and may experience a price increase).
Slow RSI
The Slow RSI is a variation of the standard RSI, which introduces a smoothing technique to the RSI calculation itself. The primary difference between the Slow RSI and the standard RSI lies in the calculation of the RSI value. In the Slow RSI, the current RSI value is calculated as a moving average of the previous RSI value and the standard RSI value for the current period.
The primary advantage of the Slow RSI is that it offers enhanced signal stability, reducing noise and potentially providing more reliable trading signals for traders.
Comparison with the original RSI
To better understand the potential advantages and disadvantages of the Slow RSI, it is essential to compare its performance against the original RSI.
Advantages
1. The Slow RSI provides enhanced signal stability by smoothing the RSI calculation, which can help traders better assess market conditions and identify potential overbought or oversold situations.
2. By offering more stable and reliable signals, the Slow RSI may improve the performance of trading strategies based on the RSI, especially in noisy or choppy market conditions.
Disadvantages
1. The smoothing technique employed by the Slow RSI may result in a slower response to changes in price momentum compared to the original RSI. This could lead to delayed signals for entering or exiting trades, which may not be ideal for short-term traders or fast-moving markets.
2. As the Slow RSI is less known and less widely used than the standard RSI, traders may find it more challenging to find resources and support for implementing this variation of the indicator.
The Slow RSI is an interesting modification of the standard RSI, offering potential benefits in terms of signal stability and reliability. However, it is crucial to recognize its limitations, such as a potentially slower response to changes in price momentum. Traders should carefully consider the potential advantages and drawbacks of using the Slow RSI compared to the original RSI before incorporating it into their trading strategies. Ultimately, the choice between the original RSI and the Slow RSI will depend on individual traders' preferences and the specific market conditions they are analyzing.
Ehlers Smoothed RSI
Ehlers Smoothed RSI is a variation of the standard RSI developed by John F. Ehlers, which introduces a smoothing technique to the price input data. The smoothing process involves averaging the current price with the previous two price values, which helps reduce noise and provide a more accurate representation of price momentum. The calculation of up and down price movements remains similar to the original RSI, but the smoothing technique alters the input data.
The primary advantage of Ehlers Smoothed RSI is that it reduces noise and offers a more accurate representation of price momentum, potentially providing more reliable signals for traders.
Comparison with the original RSI
To better understand the potential advantages and disadvantages of Ehlers Smoothed RSI, it is essential to compare its performance against the original RSI.
Advantages
1. Ehlers Smoothed RSI reduces noise by smoothing the price input data, which can help traders better assess market conditions and identify potential overbought or oversold situations.
2. By providing a more accurate representation of price momentum, Ehlers Smoothed RSI may offer more reliable signals for entering or exiting trades, potentially improving the performance of trading strategies based on the RSI.
Disadvantages
1. The smoothing technique employed by Ehlers Smoothed RSI may result in a slower response to changes in price momentum compared to the original RSI. This could lead to delayed signals for entering or exiting trades, which may not be ideal for short-term traders or fast-moving markets.
2. As Ehlers Smoothed RSI is less known and less widely used than the standard RSI, traders may find it more challenging to find resources and support for implementing this variation of the indicator.
Ehlers Smoothed RSI is an intriguing modification of the standard RSI, offering potential benefits in terms of noise reduction and accuracy. However, it is crucial to recognize its limitations, such as a potentially slower response to changes in price momentum. Traders should carefully consider the potential advantages and drawbacks of using Ehlers Smoothed RSI compared to the original RSI before incorporating it into their trading strategies. Ultimately, the choice between the original RSI and Ehlers Smoothed RSI will depend on individual traders' preferences and the specific market conditions they are analyzing.
Cutler's RSI or Rapid RSI
Cutler's RSI is a variation of the standard RSI, which modifies the calculation of average gains and losses. While the original RSI employs exponential moving averages (EMAs) for average gains and losses, Cutler's RSI utilizes simple moving averages (SMAs) instead. This change results in a slightly different behavior of the oscillator compared to the original RSI.
The primary advantage of Cutler's RSI is that it offers a simpler calculation method, which can potentially make it easier to understand and implement for traders. Additionally, by using SMAs, Cutler's RSI may provide a more consistent and stable representation of price momentum.
Comparison with the original RSI
It is essential to recognize the limitations and performance of Cutler's RSI compared to the original RSI to understand its potential advantages and disadvantages better.
Advantages
1. Cutler's RSI has a simpler calculation method, using SMAs instead of EMAs. This makes it easier to understand and implement for traders who prefer a more straightforward approach to technical analysis.
2. By using SMAs, Cutler's RSI may provide a more stable and consistent representation of price momentum, which can help traders better assess market conditions and identify potential overbought or oversold situations.
Disadvantages
1. The use of SMAs in Cutler's RSI may result in a slower response to changes in price momentum compared to the original RSI. This could lead to delayed signals for entering or exiting trades, which may not be ideal for short-term traders or fast-moving markets.
2. As Cutler's RSI is less known and less widely used than the standard RSI, it may be more challenging to find resources and support for implementing this variation of the indicator.
Cutler's RSI is an interesting modification of the standard RSI, offering potential benefits in terms of simplicity and stability. However, it is crucial to recognize its limitations, such as a potentially slower response to changes in price momentum. Traders should carefully consider the potential advantages and drawbacks of using Cutler's RSI compared to the original RSI before incorporating it into their trading strategies. Ultimately, the choice between the original RSI and Cutler's RSI will depend on individual traders' preferences and the specific market conditions they are analyzing.
RSI T3
The T3 RSI is a variation of the standard RSI that introduces the Triple Smoothed Exponential Moving Average (T3) into the calculation process. The primary difference between the T3 RSI and the standard RSI lies in the calculation of the average gains and losses. Instead of using simple moving averages or exponential moving averages, the T3 RSI utilizes T3 to calculate the average gains and losses for up and down price movements.
The primary advantage of the T3 RSI is that it offers enhanced responsiveness and accuracy compared to the original RSI, potentially providing more reliable trading signals for traders.
Comparison with the original RSI
To better understand the potential advantages and disadvantages of the T3 RSI, it is essential to compare its performance against the original RSI.
Advantages
1. The T3 RSI provides enhanced responsiveness and accuracy by incorporating the Triple Smoothed Exponential Moving Average into the calculation of average gains and losses. This can help traders better assess market conditions and identify potential overbought or oversold situations.
2. By offering more responsive and accurate signals, the T3 RSI may improve the performance of trading strategies based on the RSI, especially in fast-moving markets or during periods of high price volatility.
Disadvantages
1. The T3 RSI's increased responsiveness may result in more frequent trading signals, which could lead to higher trading costs or a higher likelihood of false signals.
2. As the T3 RSI is less known and less widely used than the standard RSI, traders may find it more challenging to find resources and support for implementing this variation of the indicator.
The T3 RSI is an innovative modification of the standard RSI, offering potential benefits in terms of responsiveness and accuracy. However, it is crucial to recognize its limitations, such as a potentially higher likelihood of false signals due to increased responsiveness. Traders should carefully consider the potential advantages and drawbacks of using the T3 RSI compared to the original RSI before incorporating it into their trading strategies. Ultimately, the choice between the original RSI and the T3 RSI will depend on individual traders' preferences and the specific market conditions they are analyzing.
RSI DEMA
The DEMA RSI is a variation of the standard RSI that introduces the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA) into the calculation process. The primary difference between the DEMA RSI and the standard RSI lies in the calculation of the average gains and losses. Instead of using simple moving averages or exponential moving averages, the DEMA RSI utilizes DEMA to calculate the average gains and losses for up and down price movements.
The primary advantage of the DEMA RSI is that it offers enhanced responsiveness and accuracy compared to the original RSI, potentially providing more reliable trading signals for traders.
Comparison with the original RSI
To better understand the potential advantages and disadvantages of the DEMA RSI, it is essential to compare its performance against the original RSI.
Advantages
1. The DEMA RSI provides enhanced responsiveness and accuracy by incorporating the Double Exponential Moving Average into the calculation of average gains and losses. This can help traders better assess market conditions and identify potential overbought or oversold situations.
2. By offering more responsive and accurate signals, the DEMA RSI may improve the performance of trading strategies based on the RSI, especially in fast-moving markets or during periods of high price volatility.
Disadvantages
1. The DEMA RSI's increased responsiveness may result in more frequent trading signals, which could lead to higher trading costs or a higher likelihood of false signals.
2. As the DEMA RSI is less known and less widely used than the standard RSI, traders may find it more challenging to find resources and support for implementing this variation of the indicator.
The DEMA RSI is an innovative modification of the standard RSI, offering potential benefits in terms of responsiveness and accuracy. However, it is crucial to recognize its limitations, such as a potentially higher likelihood of false signals due to increased responsiveness. Traders should carefully consider the potential advantages and drawbacks of using the DEMA RSI compared to the original RSI before incorporating it into their trading strategies. Ultimately, the choice between the original RSI and the DEMA RSI will depend on individual traders' preferences and the specific market conditions they are analyzing.
Harris' RSI
Harris' RSI is a variation of the standard RSI, designed to address some of its limitations and improve its performance in detecting potential trend reversals and filtering out noise. The key difference between the Harris' RSI and the standard RSI lies in the calculation of average gains and losses. While the standard RSI calculation uses exponential moving averages (EMAs) of gains and losses, Harris' RSI uses a different approach to compute the average gains and losses based on the number of up and down price movements.
The primary advantage of Harris' RSI is that it aims to provide a more adaptive and responsive indicator, making it better suited for detecting potential trend reversals and filtering out noise in the market. By taking into account the number of up and down price movements, Harris' RSI can be more sensitive to changes in the trend, potentially providing earlier signals for entering or exiting trades.
Comparison with the original RSI
While Harris' RSI offers potential improvements over the standard RSI, it is essential to recognize its limitations and compare its performance against the original RSI.
Advantages
1. Harris' RSI can potentially provide earlier signals for trend reversals due to its sensitivity to the number of up and down price movements. This can help traders to identify better entry and exit points in the market.
2. By focusing on the number of up and down price movements, Harris' RSI can filter out noise in the market, reducing the likelihood of false signals that may lead to losing trades.
Disadvantages
1. The increased sensitivity of Harris' RSI to price movements can lead to more frequent signals, which may result in overtrading and increased trading costs.
2. Harris' RSI is less known and less widely used than the standard RSI, which may make it more challenging to find resources and support for implementing this variation of the indicator.
Harris' RSI is an interesting variation of the standard RSI, offering potential advantages in detecting trend reversals and filtering out noise. However, like any technical indicator, it has its limitations and may not be suitable for all trading styles or market conditions. Traders should carefully consider the potential benefits and drawbacks of using Harris' RSI compared to the original RSI before incorporating it into their trading strategies. Ultimately, the choice between the original RSI and Harris' RSI will depend on individual traders' preferences and the specific market conditions they are analyzing.
RSI TEMA
The TEMA RSI is a variation of the standard RSI that introduces the Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA) into the calculation process. The primary difference between the TEMA RSI and the standard RSI lies in the calculation of the average gains and losses. Instead of using simple moving averages or exponential moving averages, the TEMA RSI utilizes TEMA to calculate the average gains and losses for up and down price movements.
The primary advantage of the TEMA RSI is that it offers enhanced responsiveness and accuracy compared to the original RSI, potentially providing more reliable trading signals for traders.
Comparison with the original RSI
To better understand the potential advantages and disadvantages of the TEMA RSI, it is essential to compare its performance against the original RSI.
Advantages
1. The TEMA RSI provides enhanced responsiveness and accuracy by incorporating the Triple Exponential Moving Average into the calculation of average gains and losses. This can help traders better assess market conditions and identify potential overbought or oversold situations.
2. By offering more responsive and accurate signals, the TEMA RSI may improve the performance of trading strategies based on the RSI, especially in fast-moving markets or during periods of high price volatility.
Disadvantages
1. The TEMA RSI's increased responsiveness may result in more frequent trading signals, which could lead to higher trading costs or a higher likelihood of false signals.
2. As the TEMA RSI is less known and less widely used than the standard RSI, traders may find it more challenging to find resources and support for implementing this variation of the indicator.
The TEMA RSI is an innovative modification of the standard RSI, offering potential benefits in terms of responsiveness and accuracy. However, it is crucial to recognize its limitations, such as a potentially higher likelihood of false signals due to increased responsiveness. Traders should carefully consider the potential advantages and drawbacks of using the TEMA RSI compared to the original RSI before incorporating it into their trading strategies. Ultimately, the choice between the original RSI and the TEMA RSI will depend on individual traders' preferences and the specific market conditions they are analyzing.
Jurik RSX
The Jurik RSX, developed by Mark Jurik, is a variation of the standard RSI that aims to provide a smoother and more responsive indicator by applying a unique smoothing algorithm based on a series of recursive calculations. The Jurik RSX calculates the price momentum (mom) and the absolute price momentum (moa) using a three-stage filtering process, which ultimately results in a smoother and more responsive output compared to the original RSI.
Comparison with the original RSI
To better understand the potential benefits and drawbacks of the Jurik RSX, it is essential to compare its performance against the original RSI.
Advantages
1. The Jurik RSX offers enhanced responsiveness and smoothness due to its unique recursive filtering process, allowing traders to better identify potential trend reversals, overbought, and oversold conditions.
2. The improved responsiveness of the Jurik RSX may result in more timely trading signals, helping traders to capitalize on opportunities more effectively, especially in fast-moving markets or during periods of high price volatility.
Disadvantages
1. The increased complexity of the Jurik RSX calculation may make it more challenging for traders to understand and implement compared to the original RSI.
2. As the Jurik RSX is less known and less widely used than the standard RSI, traders may find it more difficult to find resources and support for implementing this variation of the indicator.
The Jurik RSX is an innovative modification of the standard RSI, offering potential benefits in terms of responsiveness and smoothness. However, it is crucial to recognize its limitations, such as increased complexity and limited resources compared to the original RSI. Traders should carefully consider the potential advantages and drawbacks of using the Jurik RSX before incorporating it into their trading strategies. Ultimately, the choice between the original RSI and the Jurik RSX will depend on individual traders' preferences and the specific market conditions they are analyzing.
Additional Features
This indicator allows you to select from 33 source types. They are as follows:
Close
Open
High
Low
Median
Typical
Weighted
Average
Average Median Body
Trend Biased
Trend Biased (Extreme)
HA Close
HA Open
HA High
HA Low
HA Median
HA Typical
HA Weighted
HA Average
HA Average Median Body
HA Trend Biased
HA Trend Biased (Extreme)
HAB Close
HAB Open
HAB High
HAB Low
HAB Median
HAB Typical
HAB Weighted
HAB Average
HAB Average Median Body
HAB Trend Biased
HAB Trend Biased (Extreme)
What are Heiken Ashi "better" candles?
Heiken Ashi "better" candles are a modified version of the standard Heiken Ashi candles, which are a popular charting technique used in technical analysis. Heiken Ashi candles help traders identify trends and potential reversal points by smoothing out price data and reducing market noise. The "better formula" was proposed by Sebastian Schmidt in an article published by BNP Paribas in Warrants & Zertifikate, a German magazine, in August 2004. The aim of this formula is to further improve the smoothing of the Heiken Ashi chart and enhance its effectiveness in identifying trends and reversals.
Standard Heiken Ashi candles are calculated using the following formulas:
Heiken Ashi Close = (Open + High + Low + Close) / 4
Heiken Ashi Open = (Previous Heiken Ashi Open + Previous Heiken Ashi Close) / 2
Heiken Ashi High = Max (High, Heiken Ashi Open, Heiken Ashi Close)
Heiken Ashi Low = Min (Low, Heiken Ashi Open, Heiken Ashi Close)
The "better formula" modifies the standard Heiken Ashi calculation by incorporating additional smoothing, which can help reduce noise and make it easier to identify trends and reversals. The modified formulas for Heiken Ashi "better" candles are as follows:
Better Heiken Ashi Close = (Open + High + Low + Close) / 4
Better Heiken Ashi Open = (Previous Better Heiken Ashi Open + Previous Better Heiken Ashi Close) / 2
Better Heiken Ashi High = Max (High, Better Heiken Ashi Open, Better Heiken Ashi Close)
Better Heiken Ashi Low = Min (Low, Better Heiken Ashi Open, Better Heiken Ashi Close)
Smoothing Factor = 2 / (N + 1), where N is the chosen period for smoothing
Smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Open = (Better Heiken Ashi Open * Smoothing Factor) + (Previous Smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Open * (1 - Smoothing Factor))
Smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Close = (Better Heiken Ashi Close * Smoothing Factor) + (Previous Smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Close * (1 - Smoothing Factor))
The smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Open and Close values are then used to calculate the smoothed Better Heiken Ashi High and Low values, resulting in "better" candles that provide a clearer representation of the market trend and potential reversal points.
It's important to note that, like any other technical analysis tool, Heiken Ashi "better" candles are not foolproof and should be used in conjunction with other indicators and analysis techniques to make well-informed trading decisions.
Heiken Ashi "better" candles, as mentioned previously, provide a clearer representation of market trends and potential reversal points by reducing noise and smoothing out price data. When using these candles in conjunction with other technical analysis tools and indicators, traders can gain valuable insights into market behavior and make more informed decisions.
To effectively use Heiken Ashi "better" candles in your trading strategy, consider the following tips:
Trend Identification: Heiken Ashi "better" candles can help you identify the prevailing trend in the market. When the majority of the candles are green (or another color, depending on your chart settings) and there are no or few lower wicks, it may indicate a strong uptrend. Conversely, when the majority of the candles are red (or another color) and there are no or few upper wicks, it may signal a strong downtrend.
Trend Reversals: Look for potential trend reversals when a change in the color of the candles occurs, especially when accompanied by longer wicks. For example, if a green candle with a long lower wick is followed by a red candle, it could indicate a bearish reversal. Similarly, a red candle with a long upper wick followed by a green candle may suggest a bullish reversal.
Support and Resistance: You can use Heiken Ashi "better" candles to identify potential support and resistance levels. When the candles are consistently moving in one direction and then suddenly change color with longer wicks, it could indicate the presence of a support or resistance level.
Stop-Loss and Take-Profit: Using Heiken Ashi "better" candles can help you manage risk by determining optimal stop-loss and take-profit levels. For instance, you can place your stop-loss below the low of the most recent green candle in an uptrend or above the high of the most recent red candle in a downtrend.
Confirming Signals: Heiken Ashi "better" candles should be used in conjunction with other technical indicators, such as moving averages, oscillators, or chart patterns, to confirm signals and improve the accuracy of your analysis.
In this implementation, you have the choice of AMA, KAMA, or T3 smoothing. These are as follows:
Kaufman Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA)
The Kaufman Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) is a type of adaptive moving average used in technical analysis to smooth out price fluctuations and identify trends. The KAMA adjusts its smoothing factor based on the market's volatility, making it more responsive in volatile markets and smoother in calm markets. The KAMA is calculated using three different efficiency ratios that determine the appropriate smoothing factor for the current market conditions. These ratios are based on the noise level of the market, the speed at which the market is moving, and the length of the moving average. The KAMA is a popular choice among traders who prefer to use adaptive indicators to identify trends and potential reversals.
Adaptive Moving Average
The Adaptive Moving Average (AMA) is a type of moving average that adjusts its sensitivity to price movements based on market conditions. It uses a ratio between the current price and the highest and lowest prices over a certain lookback period to determine its level of smoothing. The AMA can help reduce lag and increase responsiveness to changes in trend direction, making it useful for traders who want to follow trends while avoiding false signals. The AMA is calculated by multiplying a smoothing constant with the difference between the current price and the previous AMA value, then adding the result to the previous AMA value.
T3
The T3 moving average is a type of technical indicator used in financial analysis to identify trends in price movements. It is similar to the Exponential Moving Average (EMA) and the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA), but uses a different smoothing algorithm.
The T3 moving average is calculated using a series of exponential moving averages that are designed to filter out noise and smooth the data. The resulting smoothed data is then weighted with a non-linear function to produce a final output that is more responsive to changes in trend direction.
The T3 moving average can be customized by adjusting the length of the moving average, as well as the weighting function used to smooth the data. It is commonly used in conjunction with other technical indicators as part of a larger trading strategy.
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: QQE of Variety RSI as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: QQE of Variety RSI
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
]█ Setting up the GKD
The GKD system involves chaining indicators together. These are the steps to set this up.
Use a GKD-C indicator alone on a chart
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Use a GKD-V indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Use a GKD-B indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Baseline (Baseline, Backtest)
1. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline"
Volatility/Volume (Volatility/Volume, Backte st)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Solo"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Signal Type" setting to "Crossing" (neither traditional nor both can be backtested)
3. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Volatility/Volume"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, a) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Trading" if using a directional GKD-V indicator; or, b) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full" if using a directional or non-directional GKD-V indicator (non-directional GKD-V can only test Longs and Shorts separately)
6. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Side" to "Long" or "Short
7. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Solo Confirmation Simple (Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
1. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Solo Confirmation Complex without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
6. Import the GKD-C into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Solo Confirmation Complex with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
7. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Full GKD without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
9. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Full GKD with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Import the GKD-C Continuation indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
9. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
10. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Baseline + Volatility/Volume (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, make sure the "Signal Type" setting is set to "Traditional"
3. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
5. Import the GKD-V into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full". For this backtest, you must test Longs and Shorts separately
7. To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you can test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-B Baseline
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Stacked 1: None
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 1
Outputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-BT Backtest or GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Stacked 1: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+ or GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
Ruckard TradingLatinoThis strategy tries to mimic TradingLatino strategy.
The current implementation is beta.
Si hablas castellano o espanyol por favor consulta MENSAJE EN CASTELLANO más abajo.
It's aimed at BTCUSDT pair and 4h timeframe.
STRATEGY DEFAULT SETTINGS EXPLANATION
max_bars_back=5000 : This is a random number of bars so that the strategy test lasts for one or two years
calc_on_order_fills=false : To wait for the 4h closing is too much. Try to check if it's worth entering a position after closing one. I finally decided not to recheck if it's worth entering after an order is closed. So it is false.
calc_on_every_tick=false
pyramiding=0 : We only want one entry allowed in the same direction. And we don't want the order to scale by error.
initial_capital=1000 : These are 1000 USDT. By using 1% maximum loss per trade and 7% as a default stop loss by using 1000 USDT at 12000 USDT per BTC price you would entry with around 142 USDT which are converted into: 0.010 BTC . The maximum number of decimal for contracts on this BTCUSDT market is 3 decimals. E.g. the minimum might be: 0.001 BTC . So, this minimal 1000 amount ensures us not to entry with less than 0.001 entries which might have happened when using 100 USDT as an initial capital.
slippage=1 : Binance BTCUSDT mintick is: 0.01. Binance slippage: 0.1 % (Let's assume). TV has an integer slippage. It does not have a percentage based slippage. If we assume a 1000 initial capital, the recommended equity is 142 which at 11996 USDT per BTC price means: 0.011 BTC. The 0.1% slippage of: 0.011 BTC would be: 0.000011 . This is way smaller than the mintick. So our slippage is going to be 1. E.g. 1 (slippage) * 0.01 (mintick)
commission_type=strategy.commission.percent and commission_value=0.1 : According to: binance . com / en / fee / schedule in VIP 0 level both maker and taker fees are: 0.1 %.
BACKGROUND
Jaime Merino is a well known Youtuber focused on crypto trading
His channel TradingLatino
features monday to friday videos where he explains his strategy.
JAIME MERINO STANCE ON BOTS
Jaime Merino stance on bots (taken from memory out of a 2020 June video from him):
'~
You know. They can program you a bot and it might work.
But, there are some special situations that the bot would not be able to handle.
And, I, as a human, I would handle it. And the bot wouldn't do it.
~'
My long term target with this strategy script is add as many
special situations as I can to the script
so that it can match Jaime Merino behaviour even in non normal circumstances.
My alternate target is learn Pine script
and enjoy programming with it.
WARNING
This script might be bigger than other TradingView scripts.
However, please, do not be confused because the current status is beta.
This script has not been tested with real money.
This is NOT an official strategy from Jaime Merino.
This is NOT an official strategy from TradingLatino . net .
HOW IT WORKS
It basically uses ADX slope and LazyBear's Squeeze Momentum Indicator
to make its buy and sell decisions.
Fast paced EMA being bigger than slow paced EMA
(on higher timeframe) advices going long.
Fast paced EMA being smaller than slow paced EMA
(on higher timeframe) advices going short.
It finally add many substrats that TradingLatino uses.
SETTINGS
__ SETTINGS - Basics
____ SETTINGS - Basics - ADX
(ADX) Smoothing {14}
(ADX) DI Length {14}
(ADX) key level {23}
____ SETTINGS - Basics - LazyBear Squeeze Momentum
(SQZMOM) BB Length {20}
(SQZMOM) BB MultFactor {2.0}
(SQZMOM) KC Length {20}
(SQZMOM) KC MultFactor {1.5}
(SQZMOM) Use TrueRange (KC) {True}
____ SETTINGS - Basics - EMAs
(EMAS) EMA10 - Length {10}
(EMAS) EMA10 - Source {close}
(EMAS) EMA55 - Length {55}
(EMAS) EMA55 - Source {close}
____ SETTINGS - Volume Profile
Lowest and highest VPoC from last three days
is used to know if an entry has a support
VPVR of last 100 4h bars
is also taken into account
(VP) Use number of bars (not VP timeframe): Uses 'Number of bars {100}' setting instead of 'Volume Profile timeframe' setting for calculating session VPoC
(VP) Show tick difference from current price {False}: BETA . Might be useful for actions some day.
(VP) Number of bars {100}: If 'Use number of bars (not VP timeframe)' is turned on this setting is used to calculate session VPoC.
(VP) Volume Profile timeframe {1 day}: If 'Use number of bars (not VP timeframe)' is turned off this setting is used to calculate session VPoC.
(VP) Row width multiplier {0.6}: Adjust how the extra Volume Profile bars are shown in the chart.
(VP) Resistances prices number of decimal digits : Round Volume Profile bars label numbers so that they don't have so many decimals.
(VP) Number of bars for bottom VPOC {18}: 18 bars equals 3 days in suggested timeframe of 4 hours. It's used to calculate lowest session VPoC from previous three days. It's also used as a top VPOC for sells.
(VP) Ignore VPOC bottom advice on long {False}: If turned on it ignores bottom VPOC (or top VPOC on sells) when evaluating if a buy entry is worth it.
(VP) Number of bars for VPVR VPOC {100}: Number of bars to calculate the VPVR VPoC. We use 100 as Jaime once used. When the price bounces back to the EMA55 it might just bounce to this VPVR VPoC if its price it's lower than the EMA55 (Sells have inverse algorithm).
____ SETTINGS - ADX Slope
ADX Slope
help us to understand if ADX
has a positive slope, negative slope
or it is rather still.
(ADXSLOPE) ADX cut {23}: If ADX value is greater than this cut (23) then ADX has strength
(ADXSLOPE) ADX minimum steepness entry {45}: ADX slope needs to be 45 degrees to be considered as a positive one.
(ADXSLOPE) ADX minimum steepness exit {45}: ADX slope needs to be -45 degrees to be considered as a negative one.
(ADXSLOPE) ADX steepness periods {3}: In order to avoid false detection the slope is calculated along 3 periods.
____ SETTINGS - Next to EMA55
(NEXTEMA55) EMA10 to EMA55 bounce back percentage {80}: EMA10 might bounce back to EMA55 or maybe to 80% of its complete way to EMA55
(NEXTEMA55) Next to EMA55 percentage {15}: How much next to the EMA55 you need to be to consider it's going to bounce back upwards again.
____ SETTINGS - Stop Loss and Take Profit
You can set a default stop loss or a default take profit.
(STOPTAKE) Stop Loss % {7.0}
(STOPTAKE) Take Profit % {2.0}
____ SETTINGS - Trailing Take Profit
You can customize the default trailing take profit values
(TRAILING) Trailing Take Profit (%) {1.0}: Trailing take profit offset in percentage
(TRAILING) Trailing Take Profit Trigger (%) {2.0}: When 2.0% of benefit is reached then activate the trailing take profit.
____ SETTINGS - MAIN TURN ON/OFF OPTIONS
(EMAS) Ignore advice based on emas {false}.
(EMAS) Ignore advice based on emas (On closing long signal) {False}: Ignore advice based on emas but only when deciding to close a buy entry.
(SQZMOM) Ignore advice based on SQZMOM {false}: Ignores advice based on SQZMOM indicator.
(ADXSLOPE) Ignore advice based on ADX positive slope {false}
(ADXSLOPE) Ignore advice based on ADX cut (23) {true}
(STOPTAKE) Take Profit? {false}: Enables simple Take Profit.
(STOPTAKE) Stop Loss? {True}: Enables simple Stop Loss.
(TRAILING) Enable Trailing Take Profit (%) {True}: Enables Trailing Take Profit.
____ SETTINGS - Strategy mode
(STRAT) Type Strategy: 'Long and Short', 'Long Only' or 'Short Only'. Default: 'Long and Short'.
____ SETTINGS - Risk Management
(RISKM) Risk Management Type: 'Safe', 'Somewhat safe compound' or 'Unsafe compound'. ' Safe ': Calculations are always done with the initial capital (1000) in mind. The maximum losses per trade/day/week/month are taken into account. ' Somewhat safe compound ': Calculations are done with initial capital (1000) or a higher capital if it increases. The maximum losses per trade/day/week/month are taken into account. ' Unsafe compound ': In each order all the current capital is gambled and only the default stop loss per order is taken into account. That means that the maximum losses per trade/day/week/month are not taken into account. Default : 'Somewhat safe compound'.
(RISKM) Maximum loss per trade % {1.0}.
(RISKM) Maximum loss per day % {6.0}.
(RISKM) Maximum loss per week % {8.0}.
(RISKM) Maximum loss per month % {10.0}.
____ SETTINGS - Decimals
(DECIMAL) Maximum number of decimal for contracts {3}: How small (3 decimals means 0.001) an entry position might be in your exchange.
EXTRA 1 - PRICE IS IN RANGE indicator
(PRANGE) Print price is in range {False}: Enable a bottom label that indicates if the price is in range or not.
(PRANGE) Price range periods {5}: How many previous periods are used to calculate the medians
(PRANGE) Price range maximum desviation (%) {0.6} ( > 0 ): Maximum positive desviation for range detection
(PRANGE) Price range minimum desviation (%) {0.6} ( > 0 ): Mininum negative desviation for range detection
EXTRA 2 - SQUEEZE MOMENTUM Desviation indicator
(SQZDIVER) Show degrees {False}: Show degrees of each Squeeze Momentum Divergence lines to the x-axis.
(SQZDIVER) Show desviation labels {False}: Whether to show or not desviation labels for the Squeeze Momentum Divergences.
(SQZDIVER) Show desviation lines {False}: Whether to show or not desviation lines for the Squeeze Momentum Divergences.
EXTRA 3 - VOLUME PROFILE indicator
WARNING: This indicator works not on current bar but on previous bar. So in the worst case it might be VP from 4 hours ago. Don't worry, inside the strategy calculus the correct values are used. It's just that I cannot show the most recent one in the chart.
(VP) Print recent profile {False}: Show Volume Profile indicator
(VP) Avoid label price overlaps {False}: Avoid label prices to overlap on the chart.
EXTRA 4 - ZIGNALY SUPPORT
(ZIG) Zignaly Alert Type {Email}: 'Email', 'Webhook'. ' Email ': Prepare alert_message variable content to be compatible with zignaly expected email content format. ' Webhook ': Prepare alert_message variable content to be compatible with zignaly expected json content format.
EXTRA 5 - DEBUG
(DEBUG) Enable debug on order comments {False}: If set to true it prepares the order message to match the alert_message variable. It makes easier to debug what would have been sent by email or webhook on each of the times an order is triggered.
HOW TO USE THIS STRATEGY
BOT MODE: This is the default setting.
PROPER VOLUME PROFILE VIEWING: Click on this strategy settings. Properties tab. Make sure Recalculate 'each time the order was run' is turned off.
NEWBIE USER: (Check PROPER VOLUME PROFILE VIEWING above!) You might want to turn on the 'Print recent profile {False}' setting. Alternatively you can use my alternate realtime study: 'Resistances and supports based on simplified Volume Profile' but, be aware, it might consume one indicator.
ADVANCED USER 1: Turn on the 'Print price is in range {False}' setting and help us to debug this subindicator. Also help us to figure out how to include this value in the strategy.
ADVANCED USER 2: Turn on the all the (SQZDIVER) settings and help us to figure out how to include this value in the strategy.
ADVANCED USER 3: (Check PROPER VOLUME PROFILE VIEWING above!) Turn on the 'Print recent profile {False}' setting and report any problem with it.
JAIME MERINO: Just use the indicator as it comes by default. It should only show BUY signals, SELL signals and their associated closing signals. From time to time you might want to check 'ADVANCED USER 2' instructions to check that there's actually a divergence. Check also 'ADVANCED USER 1' instructions for your amusement.
EXTRA ADVICE
It's advised that you use this strategy in addition to these two other indicators:
* Squeeze Momentum Indicator
* ADX
so that your chart matches as close as possible to TradingLatino chart.
ZIGNALY INTEGRATION
This strategy supports Zignaly email integration by default. It also supports Zignaly Webhook integration.
ZIGNALY INTEGRATION - Email integration example
What you would write in your alert message:
||{{strategy.order.alert_message}}||key=MYSECRETKEY||
ZIGNALY INTEGRATION - Webhook integration example
What you would write in your alert message:
{ {{strategy.order.alert_message}} , "key" : "MYSECRETKEY" }
CREDITS
I have reused and adapted some code from
'Directional Movement Index + ADX & Keylevel Support' study
which it's from TradingView console user.
I have reused and adapted some code from
'3ema' study
which it's from TradingView hunganhnguyen1193 user.
I have reused and adapted some code from
'Squeeze Momentum Indicator ' study
which it's from TradingView LazyBear user.
I have reused and adapted some code from
'Strategy Tester EMA-SMA-RSI-MACD' study
which it's from TradingView fikira user.
I have reused and adapted some code from
'Support Resistance MTF' study
which it's from TradingView LonesomeTheBlue user.
I have reused and adapted some code from
'TF Segmented Linear Regression' study
which it's from TradingView alexgrover user.
I have reused and adapted some code from
"Poor man's volume profile" study
which it's from TradingView IldarAkhmetgaleev user.
FEEDBACK
Please check the strategy source code for more detailed information
where, among others, I explain all of the substrats
and if they are implemented or not.
Q1. Did I understand wrong any of the Jaime substrats (which I have implemented)?
Q2. The strategy yields quite profit when we should long (EMA10 from 1d timeframe is higher than EMA55 from 1d timeframe.
Why the strategy yields much less profit when we should short (EMA10 from 1d timeframe is lower than EMA55 from 1d timeframe)?
Any idea if you need to do something else rather than just reverse what Jaime does when longing?
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
FAQ1. Why are you giving this strategy for free?
TradingLatino and his fellow enthusiasts taught me this strategy. Now I'm giving back to them.
FAQ2. Seriously! Why are you giving this strategy for free?
I'm confident his strategy might be improved a lot. By keeping it to myself I would avoid other people contributions to improve it.
Now that everyone can contribute this is a win-win.
FAQ3. How can I connect this strategy to my Exchange account?
It seems that you can attach alerts to strategies.
You might want to combine it with a paying account which enable Webhook URLs to work.
I don't know how all of this works right now so I cannot give you advice on it.
You will have to do your own research on this subject. But, be careful. Automating trades, if not done properly,
might end on you automating losses.
FAQ4. I have just found that this strategy by default gives more than 3.97% of 'maximum series of losses'. That's unacceptable according to my risk management policy.
You might want to reduce default stop loss setting from 7% to something like 5% till you are ok with the 'maximum series of losses'.
FAQ5. Where can I learn more about your work on this strategy?
Check the source code. You might find unused strategies. Either because there's not a substantial increases on earnings. Or maybe because they have not been implemented yet.
FAQ6. How much leverage is applied in this strategy?
No leverage.
FAQ7. Any difference with original Jaime Merino strategy?
Most of the times Jaime defines an stop loss at the price entry. That's not the case here. The default stop loss is 7% (but, don't be confused it only means losing 1% of your investment thanks to risk management). There's also a trailing take profit that triggers at 2% profit with a 1% trailing.
FAQ8. Why this strategy return is so small?
The strategy should be improved a lot. And, well, backtesting in this platform is not guaranteed to return theoric results comparable to real-life returns. That's why I'm personally forward testing this strategy to verify it.
MENSAJE EN CASTELLANO
En primer lugar se agradece feedback para mejorar la estrategia.
Si eres un usuario avanzado y quieres colaborar en mejorar el script no dudes en comentar abajo.
Ten en cuenta que aunque toda esta descripción tenga que estar en inglés no es obligatorio que el comentario esté en inglés.
CHISTE - CASTELLANO
¡Pero Jaime!
¡400.000!
¡Tu da mun!
AccumulationPro Money Flow StrategyAccumulationPro Money Flow Strategy identifies stock trading opportunities by analyzing money flow and potential long-only opportunities following periods of increased money inflow. It employs proprietary responsive indicators and oscillators to gauge the strength and momentum of the inflow relative to previous periods, detecting money inflow, buying/selling pressure, and potential continuation/reversals, while using trailing stop exits to maximize gains while minimizing losses, with careful consideration of risk management and position sizing.
Setup Instructions:
1. Configuring the Strategy Properties:
Click the "Settings" icon (the gear symbol) next to the strategy name.
Navigate to the "Properties" tab within the Settings window.
Initial Capital: This value sets the starting equity for the strategy backtesting. Keep in mind that you will need to specify your current account size in the "Inputs" settings for position sizing.
Base Currency: Leave this setting at its "Default" value.
Order Size: This setting, which determines the capital used for each trade during backtesting, is automatically calculated and updated by the script. You should leave it set to "1 Contract" and the script will calculate the appropriate number of contracts based on your risk per trade, account size, and stop-loss placement.
Pyramiding: Set this setting at 1 order to prevent the strategy from adding to existing positions.
Commission: Enter your broker's commission fee per trade as a percentage, some brokers might offer commission free trading. Verify Price for limit orders: Keep this value as 0 ticks.
Slippage: This value depends on the instrument you are trading, If you are trading liquid stocks on a 1D chart slippage might be neglected. You can Keep this value as 1 ticks if you want to be conservative.
Margin for long positions/short positions: Set both of these to 100% since this strategy does not employ leverage or margin trading.
Recalculate:
Select the "After order is filled" option.
Select the "On every tick" option.
Fill Orders: Keep “Using bar magnifier” unselected.
Select "On bar close". Select "Using standard OHLC"
2. Configuring the Strategy Inputs:
Click the "Inputs" tab in the Settings window.
From/Thru (Date Range): To effectively backtest the strategy, define a substantial period that includes various bullish and bearish cycles. This ensures the testing window captures a range of market conditions and provides an adequate number of trades. It is usually favorable to use a minimum of 8 years for backtesting. Ensure the "Show Date Range" box is checked.
Account Size: This is your actual current Account Size used in the position sizing table calculations.
Risk on Capital %: This setting allows you to specify the percentage of your capital you are willing to risk on each trade. A common value is 0.5%.
3. Configuring Strategy Style:
Select the "Style" tab.
Select the checkbox for “Stop Loss” and “Stop Loss Final” to display the black/red Average True Range Stop Loss step-lines
Make sure the checkboxes for "Upper Channel", "Middle Line", and "Lower Channel" are selected.
Select the "Plots Background" checkboxes for "Color 0" and "Color 1" so that the potential entry and exit zones become color-coded.
Having the checkbox for "Tables" selected allows you to see position sizing and other useful information within the chart.
Have the checkboxes for "Trades on chart" and "Signal Labels" selected for viewing entry and exit point labels and positions.
Uncheck* the "Quantity" checkbox.
Precision: select “Default”.
Check “Labels on price scale”
Check “Values in status line”
Strategy Application Guidelines:
Entry Conditions:
The strategy identifies long entry opportunities based on substantial money inflow, as detected by our proprietary indicators and oscillators. This assessment considers the strength and momentum of the inflow relative to previous periods, in conjunction with strong price momentum (indicated by our modified, less-lagging MACD) and/or a potential price reversal (indicated by our modified, less-noisy Stochastic). Additional confirmation criteria related to price action are also incorporated. Potential entry and exit zones are visually represented by bands on the chart.
A blue upward-pointing arrow, accompanied by the label 'Long' and green band fills, signifies a long entry opportunity. Conversely, a magenta downward-pointing arrow, labeled 'Close entry(s) order Long' with yellow band fills, indicates a potential exit.
Take Profit:
The strategy employs trailing stops, rather than fixed take-profit levels, to maximize gains while minimizing losses. Trailing stops adjust the stop-loss level as the stock price moves in a favorable direction. The strategy utilizes two types of trailing stop mechanisms: one based on the Average True Range (ATR), and another based on price action, which attempts to identify shifts in price momentum.
Stop Loss:
The strategy uses an Average True Range (ATR)-based stop-loss, represented by two lines on the chart. The black line indicates the primary ATR-based stop-loss level, set upon trade entry. The red line represents a secondary ATR stop-loss buffer, used in the position sizing calculation to account for potential slippage or price gaps.
To potentially reduce the risk of stop-hunting, discretionary traders might consider using a market sell order within the final 30 to 60 minutes of the main session, instead of automated stop-loss orders.
Order Types:
Market Orders are intended for use with this strategy, specifically when the candle and signal on the chart stabilize within the final 30 to 60 minutes of the main trading session.
Position Sizing:
A key aspect of this strategy is that its position size is calculated and displayed in a table on the chart. The position size is calculated based on stop-loss placement, including the stop-loss buffer, and the capital at risk per trade which is commonly set around 0.5% Risk on Capital per Trade.
Backtesting:
The backtesting results presented below the chart are for informational purposes only and are not intended to predict future performance. Instead, they serve as a tool for identifying instruments with which the strategy has historically performed well.
It's important to note that the backtester utilizes a tiny portion of the capital for each trade while our strategy relies on a diversified portfolio of multiple stocks or instruments being traded at once.
Important Considerations:
Volume data is crucial; the strategy will not load or function correctly without it. Ensure that your charts include volume data, preferably from a centralized exchange.
Our system is designed for trading a portfolio. Therefore, if you intend to use our system, you should employ appropriate position sizing, without leverage or margin, and seek out a variety of long opportunities, rather than opening a single trade with an excessively large position size.
If you are trading without automated signals, always allow the chart to stabilize. Refrain from taking action until the final 1 hour to 30 minutes before the end of the main trading session to minimize the risk of acting on false signals.
To align with the strategy's design, it's generally preferable to enter a trade during the same session that the signal appears, rather than waiting for a later session.
Disclaimer:
Trading in financial markets involves a substantial degree of risk. You should be aware of the potential for significant financial losses. It is imperative that you trade responsibly and avoid overtrading, as this can amplify losses. Remember that market conditions can change rapidly, and past performance is not indicative of future results. You could lose some or all of your initial investment. It is strongly recommended that you fully understand the risks involved in trading and seek independent financial advice from a qualified professional before using this strategy.
Pro Volume By TradeINskiOverview
The Pro Volume By TradeINski indicator is a comprehensive trading tool designed to enhance volume analysis, position sizing, and trend identification. It integrates multiple trading metrics into a single dashboard, helping traders make informed decisions based on volume dynamics, momentum bursts, trend intensity, and risk management.
Key Features
1. Position Size Calculator
Helps traders determine optimal position sizes based on risk parameters:
Capital & Risk Amount: Set account size and risk per trade.
Lot Size Adjustments: Automatically calculates nearest lot size for futures trading.
Stop Loss-Based Quantity: Computes position size based on distance from stop-loss levels (LOD or mid-price).
Standard Stop Losses: Predefined stop-loss levels (1%, 1.25%, 1.5%, 1.75%) for quick risk assessment.
Reverse Pyramiding: Enhances position sizing with adjustable risk multipliers (25%, 50%).
Closing Range & Range Expansion: Measures price strength and volatility expansion.
2. Volume Analysis & Bar Coloring
Default Bar Colors: Green for bullish bars, red for bearish bars.
Dry Volume Detection: Highlights low-volume bars (below 20-period SMA) in gray.
3. Momentum Burst (MB)
Identifies high-momentum moves:
Bullish Momentum: Volume surge + price rise ≥ user-defined threshold (default: 4%).
Bearish Momentum: Volume surge + price drop ≥ user-defined threshold (default: -4%).
4. Trend Intensity (TI)
Measures trend strength using moving averages:
Fast MA (7) vs. Slow MA (65): Highlights strong bullish/bearish trends when deviation exceeds sensitivity threshold (default: 5%).
5. Anticipation (ANTS)
Detects consolidation before potential breakouts:
Price Change Range: Filters minor price fluctuations (default: -0.4% to +0.4%).
Trend Confirmation: Requires TI_65 sensitivity (default: 5%) for validation.
6. Episodic Pivot (EP)
Flags unusually high-volume bars (default: 9M+ volume) as potential trend reversal or continuation signals.
7. Data Metrics Table
Displays key trading metrics:
Trend Intensity (TI): 21-period SMA comparison.
Industry & Sector: Stock classification.
Market Cap & Free Float: Fundamental liquidity metrics.
Volume × Price (VP): Monetary value of traded volume.
Relative Volume (RV): Today’s volume vs. previous day.
Persistent Intensity (PI): Count of consecutive up closes (default: 21-period).
Use Cases for Traders
✅ Day Traders: Identify momentum bursts and high-volume breakouts.
✅ Swing Traders: Use trend intensity and episodic pivots to confirm trends.
✅ Position Traders: Optimize risk with dynamic position sizing.
✅ Risk Managers: Set stop-loss levels and reverse pyramiding for controlled exposure.
Settings & Customization Overview
The Pro Volume By TradeINski indicator is a comprehensive trading tool designed to enhance volume analysis, position sizing, and trend identification. It integrates multiple trading metrics into a single dashboard, helping traders make informed decisions based on volume dynamics, momentum bursts, trend intensity, and risk management.
Key Features
1. Position Size Calculator
Helps traders determine optimal position sizes based on risk parameters:
Capital & Risk Amount: Set account size and risk per trade.
Lot Size Adjustments: Automatically calculates nearest lot size for futures trading.
Stop Loss-Based Quantity: Computes position size based on distance from stop-loss levels (LOD or mid-price).
Standard Stop Losses: Predefined stop-loss levels (1%, 1.25%, 1.5%, 1.75%) for quick risk assessment.
Reverse Pyramiding: Enhances position sizing with adjustable risk multipliers (25%, 50%).
Closing Range & Range Expansion: Measures price strength and volatility expansion.
2. Volume Analysis & Bar Coloring
Default Bar Colors: Green for bullish bars, red for bearish bars.
Dry Volume Detection: Highlights low-volume bars (below 20-period SMA) in gray.
3. Momentum Burst (MB)
Identifies high-momentum moves:
Bullish Momentum: Volume surge + price rise ≥ user-defined threshold (default: 4%).
Bearish Momentum: Volume surge + price drop ≥ user-defined threshold (default: -4%).
4. Trend Intensity (TI)
Measures trend strength using moving averages:
Fast MA (7) vs. Slow MA (65): Highlights strong bullish/bearish trends when deviation exceeds sensitivity threshold (default: 5%).
5. Anticipation (ANTS)
Detects consolidation before potential breakouts:
Price Change Range: Filters minor price fluctuations (default: -0.4% to +0.4%).
Trend Confirmation: Requires TI_65 sensitivity (default: 5%) for validation.
6. Episodic Pivot (EP)
Flags unusually high-volume bars (default: 9M+ volume) as potential trend reversal or continuation signals.
7. Data Metrics Table
Displays key trading metrics:
Trend Intensity (TI): 21-period SMA comparison.
Industry & Sector: Stock classification.
Market Cap & Free Float: Fundamental liquidity metrics.
Volume × Price (VP): Monetary value of traded volume.
Relative Volume (RV): Today’s volume vs. previous day.
Persistent Intensity (PI): Count of consecutive up closes (default: 21-period).
Use Cases for Traders
✅ Day Traders: Identify momentum bursts and high-volume breakouts.
✅ Swing Traders: Use trend intensity and episodic pivots to confirm trends.
✅ Position Traders: Optimize risk with dynamic position sizing.
✅ Risk Managers: Set stop-loss levels and reverse pyramiding for controlled exposure.
Settings & Customization
Trade Direction: Long, Short, or Both (auto-detects based on % change).
Table Positioning: Adjust location (Top/Middle/Bottom, Left/Center/Right).
Color Customization: Modify bar colors, table lines, and background.
Trade Direction: Long, Short, or Both (auto-detects based on % change).
Table Positioning: Adjust location (Top/Middle/Bottom, Left/Center/Right).
Color Customization: Modify bar colors, table lines, and background.
Custom Strategy: ETH Martingale 2.0Strategic characteristics
ETH Little Martin 2.0 is a self-developed trading strategy based on the Martingale strategy, mainly used for trading ETH (Ethereum). The core idea of this strategy is to place orders in the same direction at a fixed price interval, and then use Martin's multiple investment principle to reduce losses, but this is also the main source of losses.
Parameter description:
1 Interval： The minimum spacing for taking profit, stop loss, and opening/closing of orders. Different targets have different spacing. Taking ETH as an example, it is generally recommended to have a spacing of 2% for fluctuations in the target.
2 Base Price： This is the price at which you triggered the first order. Similarly, I am using ETH as an example. If you have other targets, I suggest using the initial value of a price that can be backtesting. The Base Price is only an initial order price and has no impact on subsequent orders.
3 Initial Order Amount： Users can set an initial order amount to control the risk of each transaction. If the stop loss is reached, we will double the amount based on this value. This refers to the value of the position held, not the number of positions held.
4 Loss Multiplier： The strategy will increase the next order amount based on the set multiple after the stop loss, in order to make up for the previous losses through a larger position. Note that after taking profit, it will be reset to 1 times the Initial Order Amount.
5. Long Short Operation: The first order of the strategy is a multiple entry, and in subsequent orders, if the stop loss is reached, a reverse order will be opened. The position value of a one-way order is based on the Loss Multiplier multiple investment, so it is generally recommended that the Loss Multiplier default to 2.
Improvement direction
Although this strategy already has a certain trading logic, there are still some improvement directions that can be considered:
1. Dynamic adjustment of spacing: Currently, the spacing is fixed, and it can be considered to dynamically adjust the spacing based on market volatility to improve the adaptability of the strategy. Try using dynamic spacing, which may be more suitable for the actual market situation.
2. Filtering criteria: Orders and no orders can be optimized separately. The biggest problem with this strategy is that it will result in continuous losses during fluctuations, and eventually increase the investment amount. You can consider filtering out some fluctuations or only focusing on trend trends.
3. Risk management: Add more risk management measures, such as setting a maximum loss limit to avoid huge losses caused by continuous stop loss.
4. Optimize the stop loss multiple: Currently, the stop loss multiple is fixed, and it can be considered to dynamically adjust the multiple according to market conditions to reduce risk.
